2007 Buick Lucerne Owner Manual M - General Motors · 2007 Buick Lucerne Owner Manual M 1. Tires ... for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. This manual describes

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 19Safety Belts ............................................ 19Child Restraints ...................................... 43Airbag System ........................................ 70Restraint System Check ......................... 88

Features and Controls ................................. 91Keys ....................................................... 93Doors and Locks .................................. 102Windows ............................................... 108Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 110Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 113Mirrors .................................................. 129OnStar® System ................................... 135Universal Home Remote System .......... 139Storage Areas ...................................... 151Sunroof ................................................ 153

Instrument Panel ........................................ 155Instrument Panel Overview ................... 158Climate Controls ................................... 182Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 194Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 212Audio System(s) ................................... 241

Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 275Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 276Towing ................................................. 313

Service and Appearance Care ................... 323Service ................................................. 325Fuel ...................................................... 327Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 332Headlamp Aiming ................................. 377Bulb Replacement ................................ 380Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 383

2007 Buick Lucerne Owner Manual M

1

Tires ..................................................... 385Appearance Care .................................. 418Vehicle Identification ............................. 427Electrical System .................................. 428Capacities and Specifications ................ 436

Maintenance Schedule ............................... 439Maintenance Schedule .......................... 440

Customer Assistance Information ............. 459Customer Assistance and Information ..... 460Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 477

Index ........................................................... 481

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,BUICK, the BUICK Emblem, and the nameLUCERNE are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Buick Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed when you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15862327 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Passenger Seat ................................ 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Heated and Cooled Seats ........................... 12Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 13Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 14Head Restraints .......................................... 17Center Seat ................................................ 18

Rear Seats .................................................... 19Rear Seat Pass-Through Door .................... 19

Safety Belts .................................................. 19Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 19Questions and Answers

About Safety Belts ................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 25Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 33Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 34

Right Front Passenger Position ................... 34Center Front Passenger Position ................. 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42

Child Restraints ............................................ 43Older Children ............................................. 43Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 53Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 55Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ....................... 65Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 65

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 70Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 72When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 76What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 78How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 79What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 79

Passenger Sensing System ......................... 81Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 86Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 87Restraint System Check ............................... 88

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 88Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 89

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Passenger Seat

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it andrelease the bar. Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked in place.

Power Seats

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats. To adjust the seat, do any of thefollowing:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

9

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, see“Power Reclining Seatbacks” under RecliningSeatbacks on page 14.

Power Lumbar

If your vehicle has this feature, the power lumbarcontrol is located on the outboard side of thefront seats.

Press the lumbar control forward to increasesupport and rearward to decrease support in thelower seatback. Press the control up or downto raise or lower the support mechanism.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown

10

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats. Tooperate the heated seats, the ignition must be on.

The buttons are locatedon the front doorsforward of the doorhandle.

J (Heated Seat Cushion and Seatback): Pressthis button to turn on the heated seat cushionand seatback.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

Press the button to turn on the desired feature.A light on that button will display to showwhich feature is on.

There are three temperature settings for eachfeature. A column of three lights next to thebuttons will display which setting the feature is in:high, medium or low. Three lights indicate thehighest setting, two lights indicate medium andone light indicates the lowest setting.

When you press a button, the feature will turn onat the highest setting. Each time you press thebutton, the feature will decrease one temperaturesetting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the buttonuntil the display lights turn off.

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and isstarted using the remote keyless entry transmitter,the front heated seats will be turned on to thehigh setting if it is cold outside. See “RemoteVehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 95. When the key isinserted into the ignition and the ignition is turnedon, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turnthe heated seat feature back on, press thedesired button.

Driver’s Side Buttonsshown

11

Heated and Cooled SeatsThe front seats may have the heated and cooledseat feature. To heat or cool the seats, theignition must be on.

The buttons arelocated on the frontdoors forward of thedoor handle.

J (Heated Seat Cushion and Seatback): Pressthis button to heat the seat cushion andseatback.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to heatthe seatback.

H (Cooled Seat Cushion and Seatback): Pressthis button to cool the seat cushion and seatback.

Press each button to turn on the desired feature.A light on that button will display indicatingwhich feature is on.

There are three temperature settings for eachfeature. A column of three lights next to thebuttons will display which setting the feature is in:high, medium or low. Three lights indicate thehighest setting, two lights indicate medium andone light indicates the lowest setting.

When you press a button, the feature will turn onat the highest setting. Each time you press thebutton, the feature will decrease one temperaturesetting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the buttonuntil the display lights turn off.

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and isstarted using the remote keyless entry transmitter,the front heated seats will be turned on to thehigh setting if it is cold outside. See “RemoteVehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 95. When the key isinserted into the ignition and the ignition is turnedon, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turnthe heated seat feature back on, press thedesired button.

Driver’s Side Buttonsshown

12

Memory Seat and MirrorsYour vehicle may have the memory package.

The controls for this feature are located on thedriver’s door panel, and are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driver’s seat andthe outside mirrors.To save your positions in memory, do thefollowing:1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback

recliner and lumbar, and both outside mirrorsto your preferred position.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beepssound through the driver’s side front speakerto let you know that the position has beenstored.

A second seating and mirror position can beprogrammed by repeating the above steps andpressing button 2 for a second driver.

To recall your memory positions, the vehicle mustbe in PARK (P). Press and release eitherbutton 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desireddriving position. The seat and outside mirrorswill move to the position previously stored for theidentified driver. You will hear a single beep.

If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter toenter your vehicle and the remote recall memoryfeature is on, automatic seat and mirror movementwill occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 231 formore information.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, or power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat whilerecalling a memory position, the driver’s seat recallmay stop working. If this happens, press theappropriate control for the area that is not recallingfor two seconds, after the obstruction is removed.Then try recalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memory button. If thememory position is still not recalling, see yourdealer for service.

13

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position canbe recalled by pressing the exit button. You willhear a single beep. The driver’s seat willmove back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), automatic seatmovement will occur when the key is removedfrom the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 231 formore information.

Further programming for automatic seat movementcan be done using the DIC. You can select ornot select the following:

• The easy exit seat feature.

• The memory seat recall feature.

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 231.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

14

If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Passenger’s Seat shown

15

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, thecontrols used to operate them are located onthe outboard side of the seats.

• Tilt the top of the control rearward to reclinethe seatback.

• Tilt the top of the control forward to raise theseatback.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

16

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have the seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

17

Pull the head restraintup to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button,located on the top of the seatback, and push thehead restraint down.

Center Seat

Your vehicle may have a front center seat. Thisseat can be converted to a storage area bylowering the seatback. See Center Flex StorageUnit on page 152.

For information on safety belts for this position,see Center Front Passenger Position on page 35.

18

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorYour vehicle has a pass-through door that providesaccess to the trunk from the rear seats. See“Rear Seat Pass-Through Door” under Trunkon page 106.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

19

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 196 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 197.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

20

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

21

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

22

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

23

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

24

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.

25

Be sure to use the correct buckle whenbuckling your lap-shoulder belt. If you find thatthe latch plate will not go fully into thebuckle, see if you are using the buckle for thecenter passenger position.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 33.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

26

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

31


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

32

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can movethe height adjuster upjust by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

33

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 25.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up so that it is stored on the safety beltstitching, near the guide loop.

If your vehicle has a center passenger position, besure to use the correct buckle when bucklingyour lap-shoulder belt. If the latch plate will not gofully into the buckle, see if you are using thebuckle for the center passenger position.

34

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as thelap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

35

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.The latch plates for the safety belts in eachrear seating position vary in size. If the centerrear or the left rear latch plate is insertedinto the incorrect buckle, the plate will not latchproperly. Be sure you are using the correctbuckle and that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go backand start again.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

37

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. Andyou would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply forceat your abdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

38

To unlatch the belt, just push the button onthe buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for smalladults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide better positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket onthe rear side of the seatback.

39

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

40

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide intoits storage pocket on the side of the seatback.

41

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 89.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

42

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

45

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint systemcan provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We, therefore, recommend that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, including aninfant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a childriding in a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

53

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system is



fail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in the rearseat, even if the airbags are off.If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

54

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors orthe safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

55

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

56

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, nearthe crease between theseatback and theseat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

Rear Seat

57

The top tether anchors are located under the trimcovers on the rear seatback filler panel. Flipopen the trim cover to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating position where thechild restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 53 for additional information.

58

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

59

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

60

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Flip open the top tether anchor trim

cover to expose the anchor.2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and youare using a singletether, route the tetherover the headrestraint.

61

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tetheraround the headrestraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

62

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

63

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

64

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center frontseat position.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 53.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 81 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 198 for more informationon this, including important safety information.

65

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and no



one can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualPassenger Seat on page 9 or Power Seatson page 9.

66

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 81. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See ManualPassenger Seat on page 9 or Power Seatson page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator on the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit when youturn the ignition to RUN or START. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 198.

67

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

68

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theoverhead console will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

69

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has six airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver and anotherfrontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and another for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and passenger directly behind the driver.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.


70


Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags androof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

71

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 197 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

72

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driveris in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.

73

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the person seated directly behind the driveris in the ceiling above the side windows.

74

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger is in the ceiling above theside windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie-down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating airbag will be blocked.Do not let seat covers block the inflationpath of a side impact airbag. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

75

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

Your vehicle has a “dual stage” driver airbag,which adjusts the restraint according to crashseverity using electronic frontal sensor(s) whichhelp the sensing system distinguish betweena moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. The “dual stage” driver airbaginflates to a level less than full deployment formoderate frontal impacts and to a full deploymentfor more severe frontal impacts.

Your vehicle also has a “dual depth” passengerairbag that adjusts the restraint according to crashseverity, seat location, and safety belt statususing electronic frontal sensor(s) and other specialsensors which enable the sensing system tomonitor the status of the front passenger safetybelt and the position of the front passengerseat. The passenger airbag inflates to a reduceddepth when the passenger seat is in a forwardposition. For more rearward front seating positions,the passenger airbag may inflate to an increaseddepth (a full deployment), based on safetybelt status and the crash severity measured earlyin the event. (Always wear your safety belt,even with frontal airbags.)

76

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 17 to 22 mph(27 to 35 km/h) if the other sensors do notover-ride this. The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle has sensors which enable thesensing system to monitor the position of the rightfront passenger’s seat, whether the occupant isbuckled or unbuckled. The passenger seat positionsensor and passenger safety belt buckle switchprovide information which is used to determine ifthe airbags should deploy at a reduced level or fulldeployment.

77

Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers,or rear impacts. Both roof-mounted side impactairbags will deploy when either side of the vehicleis struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity of theimpact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

78

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quicklythat some people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutes afterthe vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hub forthe driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s bag, the side of theseatback closest to the door for the seat-mountedside impact airbags, and the area along theceiling of your vehicle near the side windows forroof-mounted side impact airbags — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch.

79

There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 471.

80

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service canmean that an airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theoverhead console will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 198.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.United States Canada

81


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

82

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbags are off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 65.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

83

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbaganytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags to be enabled, theon indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are active.For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for about two minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.

84

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 197 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 87 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

85

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 478.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

86

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 460.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling andpillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 460.

87

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 422 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback, or the sideimpact airbag covering on the ceiling near theside windows, the bag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, the airbag moduleand seatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,or side impact airbag module and ceilingcovering for the roof-mounted side impactairbag. Do not open or break the airbagcoverings.

88

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 197.

89

✍ NOTES

90

Keys .............................................................. 93Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 94Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 95Doors and Locks ........................................ 102

Door Locks ................................................ 102Power Door Locks ..................................... 103Delayed Locking ........................................ 103Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 104Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 104Lockout Protection ..................................... 105Trunk ........................................................ 106

Windows ...................................................... 108Power Windows ........................................ 109Sun Visors ................................................ 109

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 110Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 110PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 111PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 112

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 113New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 113Ignition Positions ....................................... 114Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 115

Starting the Engine .................................... 116Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 117Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 119Parking Brake ........................................... 122Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 123Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 125Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 126Engine Exhaust ......................................... 127Running the Engine While Parked ............. 128

Mirrors ......................................................... 129Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 129Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 129Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 129Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar® and Compass ........................... 130Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with Compass ........................................ 132Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 133Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 134Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 134Outside Automatic Dimming

Heated Mirror ......................................... 135OnStar® System .......................................... 135

Section 2 Features and Controls

91

Universal Home Remote System ................ 139Universal Home Remote System

(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 139Universal Home Remote System

(With Three Round LED) ....................... 140Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 141Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 147

Storage Areas ............................................. 151Glove Box ................................................. 151Cupholder(s) .............................................. 151Front Storage Area .................................... 151Center Console Storage Area .................... 151Center Flex Storage Unit ........................... 152Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 152Convenience Net ....................................... 152

Sunroof ....................................................... 153

Section 2 Features and Controls

92

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

93

One key is used for theignition, the driver’s doorand the glovebox lock.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerremoves the key tag from the key and gives it to thefirst owner. Each tag has a code on it that tells yourdealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extrakeys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose yourkey, you will be able to have a new one made easilyusing the tag.If you need a new key, contact your dealer whocan obtain the correct key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 466 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

94

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to standcloser to your vehicle for the transmitter to work,try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few steps tothe left or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 95.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer ora qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be unlatched from about3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m) away with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature you canalso start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,provides an increased range of 195 feet (60 m)away. However, the range may be less while thevehicle is running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off than you were toturn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 94.

95

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter. See “RemoteVehicle Start” following for more detailedinformation.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock buttonis pressed again within five seconds of theprevious press of the lock button. See DICVehicle Customization on page 231 for additionalinformation. Pressing the lock button may armthe content theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 110.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Ifenabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 231. Pressingthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter will disarmthe content theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 110.

RKE with Remote Start RKE without RemoteStart

96

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for about one second to releasethe trunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P)for this feature to operate.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will sound threetimes. Press and hold this button for more thantwo seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundrepeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turn offwhen the ignition is moved to RUN or the alarmbutton is pressed again. The ignition must be inOFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your GM dealer. Remember tobring any additional transmitters so they can alsobe re-coded to match the new transmitter. Onceyour dealer has coded the new transmitter, the losttransmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehiclecan have a maximum of eight transmitters matchedto it. See “Remote Key” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 212.

97

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 221 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfaces maydamage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located below the trunk release button,and separate the bottom half from the top halfof the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

98

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle. It may also start the vehicle’sheating or air conditioning systems, rear windowdefogger, and heated seats. See Heated Seats onpage 11 and Heated and Cooled Seats on page 12for additional information. When the remote startsystem is active, the climate control system willheat or cool the inside of the vehicle at the settingthe vehicle was set to when the vehicle was lastturned off. The rear window defogger will be turnedon by the climate control system when it is coldoutside. If the vehicle has heated seats, they mayalso turn on. Cooled seats are not activated duringa remote start. Normal operation of the system willreturn after the key is turned to the RUN position.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has remote start, the RKE transmitterprovides, an increased range of operation.However, the range may be less while the vehicle isrunning. As a result, you may need to be closer toyour vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 94 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitter will have abutton with this symbol on it.

99

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash or if the vehicle’slights are not visible, press and hold theremote start button for at least four seconds.The vehicle’s doors will lock.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.Remote start can be extended one time.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,and the engine is still running, turn the key to theRUN position to drive the vehicle. If the vehicleis left running it will automatically shut off after10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be started remotely two separatetimes between driving sequences. The enginewill run for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another10 minutes within the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again afterthe vehicle has been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to runfor 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes are considered asecond remote vehicle start.

100

Once two remote starts, or a single remote startwith one time extension have been done, thevehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, anotherremote start can be performed.

The vehicle cannot be started remotely if the keyis in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or ifthere is an emission control system malfunction.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your RKE transmitter will have extended rangethat will allow you to lock or unlock your vehiclefrom about 195 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

101

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use either the key or the remotekeyless entry (RKE) transmitter.

102

From the inside, use the power door lock switchesor manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs arelocated at the top of the door panel near thewindow.

Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver to delay the actuallocking of the doors. When the driver’s power doorlock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter lockbutton is pressed with the key removed from theignition, and the driver’s door open, a chime willsound three times to signal that the delayed lockingsystem is active. When all doors have been closed,the doors will lock automatically after severalseconds. If any door is opened before this, the timerwill reset itself once all the doors have been closedagain.

Pressing the driver’s or passenger’s power doorlock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitterbutton again will override this feature.

103

Personal Choice ProgrammingThe delayed locking feature can be turned on oroff, using the Driver Information Center (DIC)to program this feature. See “DELAY DOORLOCK” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 231.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed so that, when thedoors are closed, the ignition is on, and the shiftlever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doors willlock. The doors will unlock every time you stop thevehicle and move the shift lever into PARK (P).

If someone needs to get out while your vehicle isnot in PARK (P), have the person use the manuallock knob or power door lock switch. When the dooris closed again, it will not lock automatically. Usethe manual lock knob or power door lock switch tolock the door.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), you can choose various lock and unlocksettings. For programming information, seeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 231.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks, thatprevent passengers from opening the rear doorsfrom the inside.

The rear door security locks are located on theinside edge of each rear door. You must open therear doors to access them.

To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle willhave one of the following:

104

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

Lockout ProtectionIf the key is in the ignition and the power door lockswitch is used to lock the doors, all doors will lockand then the driver’s door will unlock. It is alwaysrecommended that you remove the ignition keywhen locking your vehicle.

The lockout protection feature can be overriddenby holding the power door lock switch forthree seconds or longer.

105

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It cancause unconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open themall the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 127.

Remote Trunk Release

The remote trunkrelease button is locatedin the glovebox.

Press the button to open the trunk. To use thisfeature, your vehicle must be in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N).

You can also press the remote trunk releasebutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to open the trunk. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 95.

106

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as it coulddamage the handle. The emergency trunkrelease handle is only intended to aid a persontrapped in a latched trunk, enabling them toopen the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk near thelatch. This handle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

Rear Seat Pass-ThroughYour vehicle has a small door in the rear seat.This door allows you to access the trunk frominside the vehicle.

The rear seat armrest must be down for thepass-through door to open. To release thepass-through door, move the release lever up withyour fingers. To close the door, raise it and push ituntil it latches.

107

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

108

Power Windows

The power windowswitches are locatedon the driver’s doorarmrest. In addition,each door has a switchfor its own window.

The front power window switches operate withone position for up and two positions for downmovement and the rear power window switchesoperate with one position for up and one for downmovement.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)that allows you to use the power windows once theignition has been turned off. For more information,see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 115.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on the front windows. Press theswitch to the second position to activate theexpress-down feature. To stop the window as it islowering, press down briefly on the switch again.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockoutbutton is located on the driver’s door armrestnear the window switches.

Press the right side of this button to disable therear window controls. The light on the button willcome on, indicating the feature is in use. The rearwindows still can be raised or lowered using thedriver’s window switches when the lockout featureis active.

To restore power to the rear windows, press thebutton again. The light on the button will go out.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the visor. The visorscan also be removed from the center mount andmoved to the side to block glare from the side.

Driver’s Side shown

109

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour sun visors may have lighted vanity mirrors.When you open the cover to the visor vanitymirror, the lamp will turn on.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have the optional contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switchor the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.If you are using the RKE transmitter, the doordoes not need to be open.

3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someonetries to enter the vehicle without using the RKEtransmitter or a key or turns the ignition on with anincorrect key. The horn will sound and the turnsignal lamps will flash for about two minutes.

When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be openedwith the RKE transmitter. The power door lockswitches are disabled and the doors remain locked.You must use your RKE transmitter or your key tounlock the doors when the system is armed.

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe alarm system will arm when you use eitherpower lock switch to lock the doors while any dooror the trunk is open and the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Arming with the RKE TransmitterThe alarm system will arm when you use yourRKE transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is notin the ignition.

110

Disarming with the RKE TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourRKE transmitter to unlock the doors.

The first time a remote unlock command isreceived, three flashes will be seen and three hornchirps heard to indicate an alarm condition hasoccurred since last arming.

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourkey to unlock the doors or insert your key inignition and turn it from the OFF position.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

111

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is apassive theft-deterrent system. This means you donot have to do anything special to arm or disarmthe system. It works when you insert or remove thekey from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on, the key may have adamaged transponder. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be not damaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 428.If the engine still does not start with the other key,your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle doesstart, the first key may be faulty. See your dealerwho can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 466.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keysonly. If all the currently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must see your dealer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

112

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe RUN position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to the OFF position.

5. The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the PASS-Key® III+ system atthis time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 315 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

113

Ignition PositionsWith the ignition key in the ignition, the key can beturned to four different positions:

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is in allthe way. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed. Thisposition locks the ignition and transaxle. It is atheft-deterrent feature.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radioand windshield wipers operate while the engine isoff. To use ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (RUN): This position is where the key returnsto after the vehicle is started. This position displayssome of the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ACCESSORY or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will display DRIVERDOOR OPEN when the driver’s door is opened ifthe ignition is in OFF, ACCESSORY and the key isin the ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 221 for more information.

114

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle afterit has been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)After you turn the ignition off and remove the key,you will still have power to such accessories as thepower windows, clock, radio, and if equipped, audiosteering wheel controls and sunroof. The powerto the accessories can last up to 10 minutes. Theinstrument panel cluster lights will stay on for afew seconds, then will go out. Once you open thedriver’s door, the power will shut off. Your vehiclehas a feature designed to protect the batteryagainst drainage. For more information seeInadvertent Power Battery Saver on page 177and Electric Power Management on page 176.

115

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your engine gets warm. Donot race the engine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components. Ifthe ignition key is turned to the START position,and then released when the engine beginscranking, the engine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If theengine does not start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

116

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there as youhold the key in START for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts, let go of the keyand accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline from the engine. Donot race the engine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyuntil the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterIf your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather,0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heatercan help. You’ll get easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up. Usually, thecoolant heater should be plugged in a minimumof four hours prior to starting your vehicle.At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of thecoolant heater is not required.

117

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.On vehicles with the 3.8L V6 engine,the coolant heater cord is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle, above theheadlamp assembly. On vehicles with the 4.6LV8 engine, the cord is located on the driver’sside of the vehicle on the right side of theengine air cleaner. It is between the enginecover and the engine air cleaner.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

118

Automatic Transaxle Operation

Your vehicle may have a shift lever located eitheron the steering column or on the console betweenthe seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.



Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 123. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 315.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You have to fullyapply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) while the ignition is in RUN. If you cannotshift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shiftlever and push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application.Then move the shift lever into the gear you want.See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 125.

119

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 306.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeeds when shifting your vehicle.

120

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 290.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You mightchoose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting between gearsand when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without using yourbrakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or indeep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while going forward, the transaxle willnot shift into first gear until the vehicle is goingslowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

121

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedalis located to the left ofthe regular brake pedal,near the driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push theparking brake pedal down with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lighton the instrument panel cluster should comeon. If it does not, you need to have your vehicleserviced.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake isset, the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light willcome on and stay on until the parking brake isreleased. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 201 for more information.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot and pushthe parking brake pedal down with your leftfoot. When you lift your left foot, the parkingbrake pedal will follow it to the released position.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 315.

122

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 315.

Steering Column Shift LeverIf your vehicle has a steering column shift lever,use the following procedure to shift the vehicle intoPARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pullingthe shift lever toward you and moving it up asfar as it will go.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 122 for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

123

Console Shift LeverIf your vehicle is equipped with a console shiftlever, use the following procedure to shiftthe vehicle into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushingthe lever all the way toward the front of yourvehicle and then to the left.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 122 for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehicle couldmove suddenly if the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you leave the vehicle with theengine running, it could overheat and evencatch fire. You or others could be injured.Do not leave your vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. See Parking Brake on page 122 for moreinformation.

124

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torquelock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 123.

If torque lock does occur, you may need tohave another vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawl inthe transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever outof PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply your regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe ignition is RUN. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 119.

The shift lock control system is designed to do thefollowing:

• Prevent the ignition key from being removedunless the shift lever is in PARK (P).

• Prevent movement of the console shift leverout of PARK (P) unless the ignition is in aposition other than OFF.

The shift lock control system is always functionalexcept in the case of a dead battery or lowvoltage (less than 9 V) battery.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease thepressure on the shift lever. Push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then move the shift lever intothe gear you want.

If you are still having a problem shifting, then haveyour vehicle serviced soon.

125

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

126

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

127

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 127.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 302.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 123.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 315.

128

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up ordown and side to side. The control at the bottom ofthe mirror is the day/night feature that allowsadjustment to the mirror so that the glare ofheadlamps from behind is reduced. Push thecontrol for daytime use; pull it for night use.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

Mirror OperationYour vehicle may have a manual rearview mirrorwith the OnStar® System. You can adjust the mirrorfor day or night driving. Press the tab forward forday driving. Pull the tab back for night driving.There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 135 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirrorhousing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with the OnStar® system.

There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®

system. See your dealer for more informationon the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.See OnStar® System on page 135 for moreinformation about the services OnStar® provides.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

129

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started. Tooperate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the left

of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press andhold the on/off button until the light comes on,indicating that the mirror is in automaticdimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button untilthe indicator light turns off.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and the OnStar®

system.There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®

system. See your dealer for more information onthe system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. SeeOnStar® System on page 135 for more informationabout the services OnStar® provides.


Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the indicator light, located to theleft of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, pressand hold the on/off button until the lightcomes on, indicating that the mirror is inautomatic dimming mode.


Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

There is a compass display in the window in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassdisplays a maximum of two characters. Forexample, “NE” is displayed for north-east.

130

Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button to activate thecompass calibration mode. CAL will be displayedin the compass window on the mirror.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. Themirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.It will be necessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance if you liveoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distance cross-country trip,it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance.If not adjusted to account for compass variance,your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button forsix seconds. Release the button when (FORZONE) is displayed. The number shown is thecurrent zone number.

3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear inthe window on the mirror by pressing the on/offbutton. Once you find your zone number,release the button. After about four seconds,the mirror will return to the compass display,and the new zone number will be set.

131

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass. This featureenables the mirror to sense nighttime glare fromvehicle headlamps from behind and automaticallydim to reduce the glare to a safe level. Theautomatic dimming feature turns on each time thevehicle is started.


Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started. Tooperate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the leftof the on/off button, is on. If it’s not, press andhold the on/off button until the light comes on,indicating that the mirror is in automaticdimming mode.


Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example), theremay be a strong magnetic field interfering with thecompass. Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, orsimilar object. If the letter C or CAL appears in thecompass window, the compass may need to bereset or calibrated.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

132

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If themirror is not adjusted for compass variance, thecompass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if thevehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® andCompass on page 130 for map information.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on the display,press the on/off button quickly until you reachthe correct zone number. If C or CAL appearsin the compass window, the compass mayneed calibration. See “Compass Calibration”listed previously.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Press the left or right side of the selector switchlocated beneath the control pad to choose the leftor right mirror.

To adjust the mirror, press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad to move the mirrorin the direction you want it to go. Adjust eachoutside mirror so that you can see a little of yourvehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.

The mirrors may also have an arrow that flasheswhen the turn signal is used. See Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 162.

133

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorIf your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, itwill also be capable of performing the curb viewassist mirror feature. This feature will allow thedriver’s and passenger’s side mirror to tilt to afactory programmed position when the vehicleis in REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful inallowing you to view the curb when you are parallelparking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)or the ignition is turned to off, the driver’s andpassenger’s side mirror will return to its originalposition.

See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 231 formore information.

Outside Convex MirrorThe passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

134

Outside Automatic DimmingHeated MirrorIf you have this feature, the outside driver’s mirrorwill adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you.

When you operate the rear window defogger, theheated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearviewmirrors are warmed to help clear them of ice andsnow. See “Rear Window Defogger” under ClimateControl System on page 182 or Dual AutomaticClimate Control System on page 186 for moreinformation.

Your vehicle may also have a turn signal indicatoron the mirror. An arrow on the outside rearviewmirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lanechange. See Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 162 for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide range ofsafety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,press the OnStar® button and they can contactRoadside Service for you.

135

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year, orupgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be available until youregister with OnStar®.

136

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owners Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

137

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owners Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 271 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to an OnStar®

Call Center at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we canprovide you with location-based services.OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle isin a place where OnStar® has an agreement with awireless service provider for service in that area.OnStar® service also cannot work unless youare in a place where the wireless service providerOnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,network capacity and reception when the service isneeded, and technology that is compatible with theOnStar® service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

138

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of your radioto hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to theOnStar® buttons is red, this means that your systemis not functioning properly and should be checkedby a dealer. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar® subscription has expired.You can always press the OnStar® button toconfirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote Systemprovides a way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2OHHL3.

139




The Canadian Registration ID numberis 2791032007A.


Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote Systemprovides a way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.

140




The Canadian Registration ID numberis 3521A-GTE05A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

141

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have another personavailable to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle, theprogrammed buttons should be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing your Universal HomeRemote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clearof the garage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garagedoor, it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open your garagedoor opener’s remote control battery cover. Yourgarage door opener is a fixed code device if there isa panel of switches. If not, your garage door openeris a rolling code device.

142

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

Example of Switch Settings

143

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. Inorder from left to right, and within twoand one-half minutes, enter each switchsetting into the Universal Home RemoteSystem. Push one button for each switchas follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like to useto control the garage door until the garage doormoves. The indicator light above the selectedbutton should slowly blink. You may need tohold the button from five to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, or homelighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 7 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Example

144

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4 dependingon your garage control unit. If you cannot locatethe “learn” button, refer to the owner’s guide foryour garage door opener.

3. Press and hold the button you would like to useto control the garage door until the garage doormoves. The indicator light, above the selectedbutton, should slowly blink. You may need tohold the button from five to 20 seconds.

145

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, or homelighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosing adifferent function button in Step 4 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for about 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly abovethe buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 464.

146

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation(With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there is one triangular Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructions below. If yourvehicle has three round LED above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation (withthree round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist you in theprogramming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section or, forassistance, see Customer Assistance Offices onpage 464.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you are programming.When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

147

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside UniversalHome Remote buttons, releasing only whenthe Universal Home Remote indicator lightbegins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not holddown the buttons for longer than 30 secondsand do not repeat this step to program asecond and/or third hand-held transmitter tothe remaining two Universal Home Remotebuttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

148

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed Universal Home Remote buttonfor two seconds, then release it. Immediatelypress and hold the same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it. Immediately,press and hold the same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

149

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 464.

150

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Theglove box has a light inside. Use the key tolock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)There are cupholders located in the full floorconsole, or in the front of the center seat console.Cupholders are also located in the rear armrest.To access the full floor console cupholder slide thecover back. To access the center seat consolecupholder, fold open the front of the console.

Front Storage AreaYour vehicle has a removable front storage bin.To open, push down then release to revealthe front bin and accessory outlet. To remove,push up and forward to loosen, then pull the binout. If your vehicle has a center flex storageunit, pull the handle rearward to open the front binand accessory power outlet. To remove, pullthe bin out.

Center Console Storage Area

If your vehicle has a full floor console it has twostorage areas. To access the upper tray storage, liftthe left lever located in the front of the armrest lid.To access the lower storage area, lift the right lever.If your vehicle has a center seat console it will havetwo storage areas. To access the upper storagearea, press the button located on the front of thearmrest and lift the armrest lid. To access the lowerstorage area, pull the strap located behind the cupholder.

151

Center Flex Storage Unit

Your vehicle may have a center flex storage unitthat includes a front center seat with a lap belt andan underseat storage compartment. The centerseatback can also be used as a fold down armrest.Cupholders are also located at the front edge ofthe storage unit and can be accessed byfolding the compartment forward.

When not being used, the center seat lap belt canbe stored in the underseat storage compartment.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle has a rear seat armrest withcupholders. To access, pull the tab on thearmrest forward.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall of the trunk.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Storethose in the trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat whennot in use.

152

SunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a powersunroof.

The sunroof buttonsare located on theheadliner.

To express-open the sunroof press the rear of thedriver’s side button to the second detent position,and release. To stop the sunroof from expressopening, press the button again. If the sunshadeis in the closed position, it will open with thesunroof, or it can be opened manually.

To close the sunroof, press the front of the driver’sside button to the second detent position, andrelease.

To vent the sunroof press and hold the back ofthe passenger’s side button until the vent reachesthe desired position. Press the front of thepassenger’s side button to close the sunroof.

If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof from closing at thepoint of the obstruction. The sunroof will thenreturn to the full-open or vent position.

153

✍ NOTES

154

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 158Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 160Other Warning Devices ............................. 160Horn .......................................................... 160Tilt Wheel .................................................. 161Heated Steering Wheel ............................. 161Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 162Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 162Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 163Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 164Windshield Wipers ..................................... 164Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 165Windshield Washer .................................... 166Cruise Control ........................................... 167Exterior Lamps .......................................... 170Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 171Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 171Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 172Fog Lamps ................................................ 173Cornering Lamps ....................................... 173Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 173Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 174Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 174Entry Lighting ............................................ 174

Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 174Theater Dimming ....................................... 175Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 175Perimeter Lighting ..................................... 175Front Reading Lamps ................................ 175Electric Power Management ...................... 176Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ............... 177Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 177Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 178Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 181Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 182

Climate Controls ......................................... 182Climate Control System ............................. 182Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 186Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 192Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 192

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 194Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 194Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 196Trip Odometer ........................................... 196Tachometer ............................................... 196Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 196

Section 3 Instrument Panel

155

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 197Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 197Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 198Charging System Light .............................. 200Brake System Warning Light ..................... 201Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 202Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 202StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 203Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 204Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 204Tire Pressure Light .................................... 205Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 206Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 209Security Light ............................................ 210Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 210Cruise Control Light .................................. 210Highbeam On Light ................................... 210Fuel Gage ................................................. 211

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 212DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 212DIC Compass ............................................ 218DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 221DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 231

Audio System(s) ......................................... 241Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 242Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 243Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 245Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 251Using an MP3 ........................................... 262XM Radio Messages ................................. 269Navigation/Radio System ........................... 271Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 271Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 271Radio Reception ........................................ 272Care of Your CDs ..................................... 273Care of the CD Player .............................. 274Backglass Antenna .................................... 274XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 274

Section 3 Instrument Panel

156

✍ NOTES

157

Instrument Panel Overview

158

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 192.

B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons(If Equipped). See DIC Controls and Displayson page 212.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 162.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 194.

E. Hazard Warning Flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 160.

F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 241.

G. Exterior Lamp Buttons. See Exterior Lamps onpage 170.

H. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 174.

I. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 333.

J. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control onpage 167. Heated Steering Wheel Button(If Equipped). See Heated Steering Wheelon page 161.

K. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake onpage 122.

L. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See AudioSteering Wheel Controls on page 271.

M. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 182 or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 186.

N. Traction Control/StabiliTrak® Button. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 283and StabiliTrak® System on page 284.

O. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighteron page 182.

P. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 119.

Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 181.

R. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 106.S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 151.

159

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem. Yourfront and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel abovethe radio.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

160

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can also raise it to thehighest level to give your legs more room whenyou exit and enter the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, holdthe wheel and pull thelever toward you. Thenmove the wheel to acomfortable position andrelease the lever to lockthe wheel in place.

Heated Steering WheelYour vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.

The button for thisfeature is located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

Press the button to turn the heated steering wheelon or off. A light on the button will display whenthe feature is turned on.

The steering wheel will take about three minutesto start heating.

161

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 162.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 163.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 164.

• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wiperson page 164.

• LWindshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 166.

• _ Heated Washer Fluid. See WindshieldWasher on page 166.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever on the left side ofthe steering wheel all the way up or down. The leverreturns automatically when the turn is complete.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

You may also have an arrow in the outside mirrorthat flashes when the turn signal is used. SeeOutside Power Mirrors on page 133 for moreinformation.

162

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until thelane change is complete. If you momentarily pressand release the lever, the turn signal will flashthree times.

If the arrows flash very fast as you signal a turn or alane change, a signal bulb may be burned out andother drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb isburned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.

If the arrows do not go on at all when you signala turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 428.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than0.8 miles (1.3 km), a chime will sound at eachflash of the turn signal. To turn off the chime,move the turn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal lever away fromyou. To change from high beam to low beam,pull the turn signal lever toward you.

While the high beamsare on, this light locatedon the instrumentpanel cluster willalso be on.

163

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use the high-beam headlampsto signal the driver in front of you that you want topass. It works even if your headlamps are off.Pull the turn signal lever toward you briefly toflash-to-pass.If the headlamps are off or on low beam, thehigh-beam headlamps will turn on. They will stay onas long as you hold the lever toward you and thehigh-beam indicator on the instrument panel clusterwill come on.

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers stop after one wipe. For more wipecycles, hold the band longer on mist.

6 (Delay): Turn the band to choose the delay timebetween wipe cycles. The wiper speed can be setfor a long or short delay between wipes. The closerthe band is set to the top of the lever, the shorterthe delay.

6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away fromyou to the first solid band past the delay settingsfor steady wiping at low speed.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them. If they are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If the bladesbecome worn or damaged, replace with newblades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clearaway snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Your vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps. Afterthe windshield wipers have completed eightwipe cycles within four minutes, the headlampsautomatically turn on. See Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps on page 171 for more information.

164

Rainsense™ II WipersIf your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensoris mounted on the interior of the windshield besidethe rearview mirror and is used to automaticallyoperate the wipers. This system operates bymonitoring the amount of moisture build-up on thewindshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear thewindshield depending on the driving conditions andthe sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewerwipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes willoccur more frequently. The system operates in thedelay mode. If the system is left on for long periodsof time, occasional wipes may occur without anymoisture on the windshield. This is normal andindicates that the Rainsense™ system is active.

The Rainsense™ system is activated by turningthe wiper control band to one of the five sensitivitylevels within the delay area. The position closestto off is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one.

This allows more rain or snow to collect on thewindshield between wipes. Turning the wiper bandaway from you to higher sensitivity levels increasesthe sensitivity of the system and frequency ofwipes. The highest sensitivity setting, level five isclosest to low. A single wipe will occur each timeyou turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity levelto indicate that the sensitivity level has beenincreased.

Notice: Going through an automatic car washwith the wipers on can damage them. Turn thewipers off when going through an automaticcar wash.

The MIST and wash cycles operate as normal andare not affected by the Rainsense™ function. Thesystem can be overridden at any time by manuallychanging the wiper control to low or high speed.

Notice: Do not place stickers or other itemson the exterior glass surface directly in front ofthe rain sensor. Doing this could cause therain sensor to malfunction.

165

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

J (Washer Fluid): Press and release thispaddle, located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear the windshieldand either stop or return to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and hold the paddle.

_ (Heated Washer Fluid): The heatedwindshield washer fluid system, if your vehicle hasthis feature, may be used to help clear ice, snow,tree sap, or bugs from your windshield. Sliding theswitch on the turn signal/multifunction lever tothis position and then releasing it will activate theheated windshield washer fluid system. Thisactivation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles.The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to40 seconds to occur, depending on outsidetemperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it maytake up to 20 seconds for each of the remainingcycles. The heated windshield washer fluid systemmay be turned off at any time by sliding the switchon the turn signal/multifunction lever to thisposition again.

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam may flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) when thewasher fluid is low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 221.

166

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. This can really help onlong trips. Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruise controlon slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system, if your vehicle has this feature,begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 283. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, the cruise controlcan be turned back on.

The cruise controlbuttons are locatedon left side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator will be litwhen cruise control is on.

167

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET – : Press this button to set the speed ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol.

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if the parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed. SeeInstrument Panel Cluster on page 194.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press and release the SET– button located onthe steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

168

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control, but it does not need to be reset.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on the steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to your chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo increase the cruise speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lowerspeed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, you willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise speed youset earlier.

169

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain your speed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep your speed down. Of course, applying thebrake ends the cruise control. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ (cancel) button on the steeringwheel.

• Press the T (on/off) button on the steeringwheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps

170

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Turn the control to this position to turnoff the exterior lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlamps atnormal brightness, together with the following:• Parking Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:• Taillamps• License Plate Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with the followinglamps listed below. A warning chime will sound ifyou open the driver’s door when the ignition switchis off and the headlamps are on.• Parking Lamps• License Plate Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights

- (Fog Lamps): Push the exterior lamps controlin to turn on the fog lamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 173.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers are turnedon and have completed eight wipe cycles withinfour minutes.

When the ignition is turned to OFF, thewiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if thewindshield wipers are turned off.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you leave the exterior lamp buttons for theheadlamps or parking lamps on, remove the keyfrom the ignition and open the driver’s door,you will hear a continuous warning chime. Thechime will turn off when the lamps are turned off.

171

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmonitors the exterior light level for the operationof DRL, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system will make your low-beamheadlamps turn on at reduced brightness indaylight when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp button for the headlampsis off.

• The automatic transaxle is not in PARK (P).

When the DRL are on, only your low-beamheadlamps will be on. The parking lamps, taillamps,sidemarker and other lamps will not be on.

When it is dark enough outside, your low-beamheadlamps will come on. The other lamps that turnon with your headlamps will also turn on. Whenit is bright enough outside, the regular lampswill go off, and your low-beam headlamps changeto the reduced brightness of DRL.

To turn off all exterior lighting at night when youare parked, turn the exterior lamp control to theoff position. The exterior lamps will turn backon automatically when you move the transaxle outof PARK (P). See Exterior Lamps on page 170for more information.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

172

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the button is located on the exterior lamps control.The exterior lamps control is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column.

Your ignition must be in RUN for the fog lamps toilluminate.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lampsbutton. A light will come on in the instrumentpanel cluster to let you know that the fog lampsare on. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 194.Press the exterior lamps button again to turn thefog lamps off.

The ignition must be in RUN and the parkinglamps must be on for your fog lamps to work.

The fog lamps will go off while you changeto high-beam headlamps.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Cornering LampsIf your vehicle has this feature, the cornering lampscome on when: the headlamps or parking lamps areon, the vehicle is not in PARK (P), and you signal aturn with the turn signal/multifunction lever. Theyprovide more light for cornering.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the exterior lamp button has been left on, theexterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes afterthe ignition is turned to OFF and a door has beenopened. This protects against draining the batteryin case you have accidentally left the headlamps orparking lamps on. If you need to leave the lamps onfor more than 10 minutes, use the manual control toturn the lamps back on after the ignition is turned toOFF and any door is opened.

173

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This featurecontrols the brightness of the instrument panellights.

The knob for this control is located next to theexterior lamps control.

Push the knob in and release when it pops out.Turn the knob clockwise to increase the brightnessof the instrument panel lights and counter clockwiseto decrease the brightness. Turning the knobcompletely clockwise to the detent will turn on thecourtesy lamps.

Courtesy LampsWhen any door is opened, several lamps turn onmaking it easier for you to enter and exit thevehicle. Turn the instrument panel brightnesscontrol completely clockwise to manually turnon these lamps.

Entry LightingIf it is dark enough outside when you press theunlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the interior courtesy lamps will turn onand stay on for about 40 seconds. The lamps canbe turned off immediately by pressing the lockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter,turning the ignition key to RUN or activating thepower door locks.

Delayed Entry LightingThe interior lamps will turn on if you open the doorwhen it is dark enough outside. When you close thedoor with the ignition off, the interior lamps will stayon for up to 25 seconds or until the ignition is turnedto an on position. When the lamps turn off as aresult of the 25 second timer or the ignition switchbeing turned on, the lighting will deactivate by wayof the theater dimming effect. Locking the doors willoverride the delayed entry lighting feature and thelamps will turn off right away.

174

Theater DimmingThis feature allows for a three to five-second fadeout of the courtesy lamps instead of immediateturn off.

Delayed Exit LightingIf it is dark enough outside when you removethe key from the ignition, the interior lamps will turnon and stay on for about 25 seconds. This willgive you time to find the door pull handle or lockswitches. Once the key is inserted into the ignition,the exit lighting will be cancelled and the lightingwill fade out.

Perimeter LightingIf it is dark enough outside when the unlock buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed,the DRL, parking lamps and back-up lamps willcome on.

This feature can be programmed on for variousamounts of time in seconds for each transmitter.

See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 231for information on programming.

Front Reading LampsThe front reading lamps, located on the headliner,are turned on or off by pressing one of the buttonslocated near each lamp.

175

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC),you may see the voltage move up or down. Thisis normal. If there is a problem, an alert willbe displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produceall the power that is needed for very high electricalloads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan athigh speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessorypower outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It canincrease engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this actionmay be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 221.

176

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’sbattery against drainage from the interior lamps, orgarage door opener. When the ignition is turnedoff, the power to these features will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes. Power will be restoredfor an additional 10 minutes if any door is opened,the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switchis turned on.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, if the interior courtesylamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lampsor trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, they will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back on again until oneof the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control is turned off, thenon again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if theyare manually turned on before the ignition is off.

177

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle is equipped, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system is designed to helpyou park while in REVERSE (R). It operates only atspeeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helpsmake parking easier and helps you avoid collidingwith objects such as parked vehicles. The URPAsystem detects objects that are close to the rear ofthe vehicle which are at least 10 inches (25.4 cm)off the ground and below hood or trunk level. Thesystem detects objects up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behindyour vehicle. URPA determines how close theseobjects are from your bumper within this area.Ultrasonic sensors on the rear bumper are usedto detect the distance to the object.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of5 mph (8 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 8 feet(2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmer orhumid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle,or that are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists,or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

178

The display is locatednear the rear windowand can be seenby looking over yourright shoulder.

The display has three color-coded lights. TheURPA lights are used to provide distance andsystem information, along with beeps played outthe speakers.

How the System WorksWhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),the rear display will briefly illuminate to let you knowthe display is operating correctly. URPA comes onautomatically when the shift lever is moved intoREVERSE (R). The system also does not work at areverse speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). Toremind you of this, the red light on the rear displaywill flash.

The system can be disabled using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Controls andDisplays on page 212.

How the System Works when BackingIf the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detectsobjects close to the rear bumper. The first time anobject is detected a single beep will sound. If anobject is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedbetween 0 mph (0km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), thefollowing describes what will occur based on yourdistance to a detected object located behind thevehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will be lit.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be lit.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m)and 23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights(amber/amber/red) will be lit.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), abeeping sound will repeat for a short time andall three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit andflashing.

179

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARK ASSISTOFF will be displayed on the DIC and a red light willbe shown on the rear URPA display when the shiftlever is moved into REVERSE (R). This occursunder the following conditions:

• The driver disables the system. See DICControls and Displays on page 212.

• The parking brake pedal is pressed.

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out of yourtrunk during your last drive when you turned offthe vehicle. If the attached objects are removedfrom your vehicle before the start of your nextdrive, the system will return to normal operationunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPAassumes the object is still attached, so you willhave to wait until the vehicle is driven forwardabove 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA willreturn to normal operation.

• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So,be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper freeof mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Washing Your Vehicle onpage 422. If the DIC still displays the PARKASSIST OFF message after cleaning thebumper and driving forward at a speed of atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with URPA performance.

• When URPA is disabled without driver actionand the driver attempts to turn URPA back onusing the Driver Information Center (DIC), thePARK ASSIST ON option will not be selectableif the necessary conditions stated above fornormal system operation are not met.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure tocheck for other vehicles, obstructions and blindspots.

180

For Driver Information Center messages related toURPA, see DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 221.If the bumper is damaged, your URPA systemmay not work properly. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used to plug inelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephone orCB radio.Your vehicle may have up to three power outletsdepending on the type of front seat you have.If your vehicle has front bucket seats with a centerconsole, you will find two outlets inside the rearstorage compartment. An extra power outletcan be found in the ashtray.Your vehicle may have a small cap that must bepulled down to access the accessory power outlet.If it does, when not using the outlet be sure tocover it with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible to the accessory power outlets andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. Ifyou experience a problem see your dealer foradditional information on the accessory poweroutlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

181

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterPush down on the front center tray to reveal thefront ashtray, cigarette lighter, and accessorypower outlet. The ashtray can be removedfor cleaning. Hold the sides of the ashtrayand then pull the ashtray up and out.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

To use the lighter, push the center all the way inand let it go. When it is ready, the center willpop back out by itself. Pull out the entire unit touse it.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature and it isactivated, the climate control system will heat andcool the inside of the vehicle, using the previoussystem settings before the vehicle was turned off.The rear window defogger will be turned on by theclimate control system when it is cold outside. If thevehicle has heated seats, they will also turn on.Cooled seats are not activated during a remotestart. Normal operation of the system will returnafter the key is turned to the RUN position. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 95 for more information.

182

Operation

( (Off): Turn the left knob to this position to turnthe climate control system off.

9(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. The fan speed will be temporarily reducedbetween the transition to a new mode. The fan willresume when the new mode is complete.

If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment AirFilter on page 192 and Scheduled Maintenanceon page 442.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to warm or coolthe air coming through the outlets.

Use the right knob to select from the followingmodes:

H (Vent): This mode directs outside air to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets. Slightly cooler air is directedto the instrument panel outlets and warmer air isdirected to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed towardthe side window outlets and a little air directed tothe windshield.

In this mode, the system will automatically useoutside air.

You can also select modes by using the followingbuttons:

h (Recirculate): Press this button to recirculatecabin air through the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors from entering yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly. An indicator light below thebutton will come on in this mode. Operation in thismode during periods of high humidity and cooloutside temperatures may result in increasedwindow fogging. If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

183

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When thisbutton is pressed, an indicator light below thebutton will come on to let you know the airconditioning is activated. Air conditioning canbe selected in any mode as long as the fan knobis not in the off position.

On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up,open the windows to let hot inside air escape; thenclose them. This helps to reduce the time it takesfor the vehicle to cool down. It also helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the vent air mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select the air conditioner.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of highhumidity causing moisture to condense on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There are twomodes to clear frost or fog from the windshield.Use the floor/defog mode to clear the windows ofcondensation and to warm the vehicle’s occupants.Use the defrost mode to remove frost orcondensation from the windshield quickly.See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this sectionfor information on clearing the rear window offog or ice.Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrostmode. The recirculation mode cannot be selectedwhile in these modes.

- (Floor/Defog): This mode directs half of the airto the windshield and the side window outlets andhalf to the floor outlets. The system runs the airconditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets. Thesystem runs the air conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is near or below freezing.

184

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Anindicator light below the button will come on tolet you know that the rear window defogger isactivated. Be sure to clear as much snow fromthe rear window as possible.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in run. The rear window defogger will stayon for about 20 minutes after the button is pressedif you are traveling at slower vehicle speeds. Athigher vehicle speeds, the rear defogger may stayon continuously. If turned on again, the defoggerwill only run for about 10 minutes before turning off.The defogger can be turned off by pressingthe button again, by turning the ignition toACCESSORY or RUN, or by turning off the engine.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror when the rear windowdefogger is on. See Outside Automatic DimmingHeated Mirror on page 135 for more information.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

185

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature and it isactivated, the climate control system will heat andcool the inside of the vehicle, using the previoussystem settings before the vehicle was turned off.The rear window defogger will be turned on by theclimate control system when it is cold outside. If thevehicle has heated seats, they will also turn on.Cooled seats are not activated during a remotestart. Normal operation of the system will returnafter the key is turned to the RUN position. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 95 for more information.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic Fan): When this position isselected on the fan control, the system will adjustthe fan speed. If the OnStar® system is activatedwhen this position is selected, the fan speedwill lower.

AUTO (Automatic Mode)1. Turn the fan control to AUTO.

2. Turn the mode control to AUTO.

3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat or coolany faster. In cold weather, the system will startat reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold airinto your vehicle until warmer air is available.The system will start out blowing air at the floorbut may change modes automatically as thevehicle warms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The length of time neededto warm the interior will depend on the outsidetemperature.

186

4. Wait a few minutes for the system toautomatically regulate. Then adjust thetemperature as necessary to find yourcomfort setting.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel, near thewindshield. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.

After your vehicle is started, the display will showthe interior temperature settings.

When the ENG/MET (English/metric) button on theDriver Information Center (DIC) is pressed, thedisplay will show readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius.Use the ENG/MET button to toggle between them.

AUTO (Automatic Air Conditioning): If AUTOis selected on the fan or mode control, thesystem will automatically control the airconditioning compressor. The A/C compressorwill run automatically even at cool outsidetemperatures in order to dehumidify the air.The A/C indicator light will be lit when the systemis operating automatically, even at nearfreezing outside temperatures. Press the A/Cbutton on the fan control to turn off the A/C.

For improved window clearing performance indefog or defrost modes, the A/C compressor willrun automatically in damp cool conditions.

h (Auto Recirculation): If AUTO is selectedon either the fan or mode control, the systemwill automatically control the air inlet to supplyfresh outside air or recirculate the interior airto cool the car faster. The indicator light on therecirculation button will light whenever the systemswitches to recirculation. You may force outsideair by pressing the outside air button. Thenext time AUTO fan or mode is selected, theair inlet will reset back to AUTO operation.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob either to the left orright to adjust the fan speed. Turning this controlcompletely counterclockwise will turn on theautomatic fan operation.

If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartment airfilter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 192 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 442.

187

9 (Off): Turn the left control to this position toturn the entire climate control system off.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing positions using the right control:

F (Vent): Turn the control to this mode to directair to the instrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Turn the control to this mode todirect about half of the air to the instrument paneloutlets and most of the remaining air to thefloor outlets. In automatic operation, cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Turn the control to this mode to directmost of the air to the floor outlets with some airdirected to the side window outlets and thewindshield.

The mode control can also be used to select thefloor/defog mode. Information on defoggingand defrosting can be found later in this section.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button tooverride the automatic system and turn the airconditioning system on or off. When in AUTO,the air conditioning compressor will comeon automatically, as necessary.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may notice a small amountof water dripping underneath your vehicle whileidling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

: (Outside Air): This mode allows outside airto enter the vehicle. It can be used to preventthe inside from becoming too dry. Press this buttonto turn outside air on. Pressing the recirculationbutton will cancel this mode. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light will turn on.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to keepoutside air from coming in the vehicle. It can beused to prevent outside air and odors from enteringyour vehicle or to help cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on or off. When the button ispressed, an indicator light will come on.

188

wx (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Pressthese buttons next to the fan control to manuallyincrease or decrease the temperature insideyour vehicle.

wx (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):Press these buttons next to the mode control tomanually increase or decrease the temperature forthe front passenger. If the passenger’s climatecontrol system is off, pressing one of these buttonswill turn it on.

PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Pressthis button to turn the passenger’s climate controlsystems on or off.

If the PASS button is pressed to turn thepassenger temperature setting off, the driver’stemperature setting will control the temperaturefor the entire vehicle.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille,middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solarradiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.

There is also an interior temperature sensorlocated next to the steering wheel that measuresthe temperature of the air inside your vehicle.

189

There is also an exterior temperature sensorlocated behind the front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could cause a falsereading in the displayed temperature.

In order to prevent false temperature readings atstartup, the displayed temperature will notchange until the following occurs:

• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 k/mh) for5 minutes.

• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 k/mh) for2 and a half minutes.

The climate control system uses the informationfrom these sensors to maintain your comfort settingby adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, andthe air delivery mode. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also be used as neededto maintain cool outlet temperatures.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog from your windshield, defog and defrost.

W (Floor/Defog): Use this mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and to warm thepassengers. Turning the control to this modedirects about half of the air to the floor outlets andthe remaining air is directed to the side windowoutlets and to the windshield. When you select thismode, the system turns off recirculation and runsthe air-conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is at or below freezing.The recirculation mode cannot be selected whilein the floor/defog mode.

190

0 (Defrost): Use this mode to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly. Turning thecontrol to this mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and the side window outlets. In thismode, the system will automatically turn offrecirculation and run the air-conditioningcompressor, unless the outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicleuntil all the windows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< (Rear Defogger): Press this button to turnthe rear window defogger on or off. An indicatorlight below the button will come on to let you knowthat the rear window defogger is activated. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN. The rear window defogger willstay on for about 20 minutes after the button ispressed if you are traveling at slower vehiclespeeds. At higher vehicle speeds the rear windowdefogger may stay on continuously. If turnedon again, the defogger will only run for about10 minutes before turning off. The defogger can beturned off by pressing the button again, by turningthe ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN, or by turningoff the engine.

The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat tohelp clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrorwhen the rear window defogger is on. See OutsideAutomatic Dimming Heated Mirror on page 135 formore information.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

191

Outlet AdjustmentUse the levers, located in the middle of the frontoutlets, to change the direction of the airflow.Use the thumbwheel located between the outletsto turn them on and off.

If your vehicle has rear seat outlets, adjust thedirection of the airflow using the lever in the centerof each outlet.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors canadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside thevehicle better.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter traps most ofthe pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Likeyour vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it may needto be changed periodically. For how often to changethe passenger compartment air filter, seeScheduled Maintenance on page 442.

The access panel for the passenger compartmentair filter is located under the hood near thewindshield, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

192

To access the passenger compartment air filter,do the following:

1. Press the tabs back and left to remove thecover.

2. Insert a tool behind the push pin located onthe inboard side of the air filter compartmentto carefully pry the pin out.

3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool betweenthe air filter and the compartment wall on theoutboard side of the vehicle. Then, push in toflatten the pin holding the air filter in place.Gently remove the air filter and any loosedebris that may be inside the air filtercompartment.

4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until youhear a click. Reinstall the push pin and snapthe cover into place.

193

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to your warning lights and gages couldalso save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As youwill see in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. If youare familiar with this section, you should not bealarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work together tolet you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson when you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly — and even dangerous. So please get toknow your warning lights and gages. They are abig help.

Your vehicle has a DIC that works along with thewarning lights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 212.

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to letyou know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You will know how fast you are going, howmuch fuel you have, and many other things youwill need to drive safely and economically.

194

Your vehicle has this cluster or one very similar to it. It includes indicator warning lights and gages thatare explained on the following pages. Be sure to read about them.

United States shown, Canada similar

195

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles or kilometers.

Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the new onecan be set to the mileage total of the old odometer,then it must be. But if it cannot, then it is set atzero and a label must be put on the driver’s door toshow the old mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerA trip odometer can tell you how far you havedriven since you last set it to zero. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 212 forinformation on resetting the trip odometer.

TachometerThe tachometer tells you how fast the engine isrunning. It displays engine speed in thousands ofrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driversafety belt light will also be provided and stay onfor several seconds, then it will flash for severalmore. You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will be provided.

196

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 81 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and lightwill be repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe diagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 70.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

197

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.If there is a problem with the airbag system in yourvehicle, the Service airbag message will appearon the DIC display. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 221 for more information.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your overhead console has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will light ONand OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let youknow the status of the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled(may inflate).

United States Canada

198

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 81 for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

199

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it means thatsomething may be wrong with the airbagsystem. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger seat may not have theprotection of the airbags. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 197.

Charging System Light

When you turn the key toRUN or START, this lightwill come on briefly toshow that it is working.

If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.To save your battery until you get there, turn offall accessories.

200

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For good braking,though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’sa problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 313.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


201

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, the light(s) willcome on when yourengine is started andmay stay on forseveral seconds.That’s normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, ifthe light comes on when you’re driving, stop assoon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then startthe engine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again while you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes,but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you don’thave anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem withyour regular brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 201.The anti-lock brake system warning light will comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.

This is normal. If the light doesn’t come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

This warning lightshould come on brieflywhen the engine isstarted.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving a SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLmessage will appear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). This indicates that there may be aproblem with your traction control system and yourvehicle may need service. When this warning lightis on and the SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLmessage appears on the DIC, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

202

If the traction control system is manually turnedoff, this light will come on and the TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message will appear on the DIC.When the system is active, the light will flashwhile the system is limiting wheel spin or assistingyou in controlling the vehicle. You may also feelor hear the system working. This is normal.

See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 283and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 221for more information.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This warning lightshould come onbriefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. This light may come on after you first startto drive and the STABILITRAK NOT READYmessage will appear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See StabiliTrak® System onpage 284 for more information.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving a SERVICE STABILITRAK messagewill appear in the DIC. This indicates that theremay be a problem with the StabiliTrak® systemand your vehicle may need service. Whenthis warning light is on and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message appears on the DIC,the system will not assist you in controllingthe vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.

When the system is active, the light will flashwhile the system is assisting you in controlling thevehicle. You may also feel or hear the systemworking. This is normal.

See StabiliTrak® System on page 284 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 221 formore information.

203

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come onwhen the enginehas overheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 351 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 351. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when startingyour vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. Ifthe pointer moves towards the H (United States) orshaded in thermostat symbol area (Canada), theengine is too hot.

A temperature indicator light will turn on and achime will sound.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, and the temperatureindicator light comes on, you should pull offthe road, stop your vehicle and turn off theengine as soon as possible.


204

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

It will also come on when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message willaccompany the light. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 221 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 385 for more information.

This light will flash for about 60 seconds and thenstay on if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 393for more information.

205

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated bythe system before any problem is apparent. Thismay prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.This system is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the originaltires with other than those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) can affect yourvehicle’s emission controls and may causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 325.

206

This light should come on, as a check to show you itis working, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control systemon your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 330.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

207

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 327. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmedup.) This will be detected by the system and causethe light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic toolsto fix any mechanical or electrical problems thatmay have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in orderto help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection. Thiscan happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

208

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light tells you ifthere could be aproblem with yourengine oil pressure.

The light goes on when you turn your key to RUN orSTART. It goes off once you start your engine. Thatis a check to be sure the light works. If it does notcome on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be thereto warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

209

Security Light

For informationregarding thislight, seePASS-Key® III+Operation on page 112.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 173 formore information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 167 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 163.

210

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in yourtank. It works only when the ignition is on. When theindicator moves to the edge of the low fuel warningband, the low fuel warning light will come on and achime will sound. You still have a little fuel left, butyou need to get more fuel right away.

Here are some things that some owners askabout. None of these show a problem with yourfuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated half full, but it took more(or less) than half the tank’s capacity to fill it.

• The gage moves up a little when you turn acorner, speed up or make a hard stop.

• The gage does not go back to empty whenyou turn off the ignition.


211

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated below the speedometer in the instrumentpanel cluster. The DIC buttons are located onthe instrument panel, to the left of the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The bottom line of theDIC shows the shift lever position indicator.See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 119for more information.

If your vehicle’s DIC has these features, thecompass direction and the outside air temperaturemay also display on the DIC when viewing thetrip and fuel information. The compass directionappears on the top right corner of the DIC display.The outside air temperature automaticallyappears in the bottom right corner of the DICdisplay. If there is a problem with the system thatcontrols the temperature display, the numberswill be replaced with dashes. If this occurs, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 231 for more information.

DIC Controls and DisplaysThe DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe instrument panel, to the left of the instrumentpanel cluster.

212

DIC ButtonsThe buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information,customization, and set/reset buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, instantaneous economy, and averagespeed.

T (Vehicle Information): Press this buttonto display the oil life, park assist on vehicles withthis feature, units, tire pressure readings and TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system programming,compass zone and compass calibration on vehicleswith this feature, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter programming.

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 231for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km).

Trip A and Trip BPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at the same time.

213

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers) drivensince the ignition was last turned on. This can beused if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press and holdthe set/reset button for at least four seconds. Thetrip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was lastturned on and the vehicle was moving. Once thevehicle begins moving, the trip odometer willaccumulate mileage. For example, if the vehiclewas driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again,and then the retro-active reset feature is activated,the display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increase to5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated after thevehicle is started, but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number of miles (mi) orkilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

Fuel RangePress the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)the vehicle can be driven without refueling.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic and makingfrequent stops, this display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the numbermay change even though the same amount of fuelis in the fuel tank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fuel economies.Generally, freeway driving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVELLOW message will be displayed. See “FUELLEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 221 for more information.

214

Average EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button. The display will return to zero.

Instantaneous EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular moment and will changefrequently as driving conditions change. Thisdisplay shows the instantaneous fuel economy inmiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). Unlike average economy, this screencannot be reset.

Average SpeedPress the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows the average speed ofthe vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recorded since the lastreset of this value. To reset the value, press andhold the set/reset button. The display will returnto zero.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

215

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

Oil LifePress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains.The engine oil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 221. Youshould change the oil as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 337. In addition to the engineoil life system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 442 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until the next oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 340.

Park AssistIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this display allows thesystem to be turned on or off. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to select between ON orOFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turnedon. If you choose OFF, the system will be turnedoff. The URPA system automatically turns backon after each vehicle start. When the URPA systemis turned off and the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P), the DIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder that the system hasbeen turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 221 and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) on page 178 for more information.

216

UnitsPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.

Tire PressureThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information buttonagain until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected bythe system while driving, a message advising youto check the pressure in a specific tire will appearin the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 392 and DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 221 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead ofa value, there may be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see your dealer forservice.

Learn Tire PositionsTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learnthe tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 393. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 398 and DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 221 for more information.

Compass ZoneYour vehicle may have this feature. Undercertain circumstances, such as during a longdistance cross-country trip, it will be necessary tocompensate for compass variance and reset thezone. To change the compass zone through theDIC, see DIC Compass on page 218.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Tocalibrate the compass through the DIC, see DICCompass on page 218.

217

Remote KeyTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to match theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to yourvehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Customization Menu Items

U (Customization): Press this button to enterthe feature settings menu. This display allowsyou to customize the feature settings on yourvehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 231 for more information.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The information belowexplains how to operate this feature in the DIC.

If your vehicle has a compass in the mirror, seeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compasson page 132.

218

Compass ZoneUnder certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Variance Procedure1. Press the vehicle information button until

PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.

219

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.Navigate to one of the trip/fuel menu screensto view the direction the vehicle is moving.This will be shown in the top right corner of theDIC display.

4. If you need to calibrate the compass, usethe compass calibration procedure. See“Compass Calibration Procedure” following.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Onlycalibrate the compass in a safe location wheredriving the vehicle in circles is not a problem. If“CAL” should ever appear in the DIC display, thecompass may need calibration.

To calibrate the compass, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure

the compass zone is set to the variancezone in which the vehicle is traveling. See“Compass Variance Procedure” earlier in thissection.

2. Press the vehicle information button until thePRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASSscreen is displayed.

3. Press the set/reset button to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVEIN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in circles atless than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will display CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE when the calibration is complete.

220

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another. Some messages may notrequire immediate action, but you can press theset/reset button to acknowledge that you receivedthe message and clear it from the DIC display.Pressing any of the DIC buttons also acknowledgesand clears any messages. Some messages cannotbe cleared from the DIC display because they aremore urgent. These messages require actionbefore they can be cleared. You should take anymessages that appear on the display seriously andremember that clearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, not correct theproblem. The following are the possible messagesthat can be displayed and some informationabout them.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. See Exterior Lampson page 170 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. See Exterior Lampson page 170 for more information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle that youmay be able to notice. At the point that the featuresare disabled, this message is displayed. It meansthat the vehicle is trying to save the charge in thebattery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

221

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is required forthe vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 337 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 442 for more information.

Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.That must be done at the OIL LIFE screenunder the vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life”under DIC Controls and Displays on page 212and Engine Oil Life System on page 340.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needsto be checked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Have the tire pressures checked and set tothose shown on the Tire Loading Information Label.

See Tires on page 385, Loading Your Vehicleon page 307, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 392. The DIC display also shows the tirepressure values for the front and rear tires bypressing the vehicle information button. See DICControls and Displays on page 212. If the tirepressure is low, the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 205.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed properly. When this message appears,make sure that the driver’s door is closedcompletely.

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressor is automaticallyturned off. When the coolant temperature returns tonormal, the A/C operation automatically resumes.You can continue to drive your vehicle. If thismessage continues to appear, have the systemrepaired by your dealer as soon as possible toavoid compressor damage.

222

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 351 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 351 for more information.

This message displays along with a continuouschime when the engine has overheated. Stop andturn the engine off immediately to avoid severeengine damage. See Engine Overheating onpage 351.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

ERRORThis message displays while viewing the odometeror trip odometers if there is a problem with theinstrument panel cluster. See your dealer forservice.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 211 and Filling the Tankon page 330 for more information.

223

HEATED WASH (Washer) FLUIDSYSTEM OFFThis message displays when you manually turn offthe heated windshield washer fluid system or whenthe system automatically turns off. See “HeatedWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer onpage 166 for more information.

HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUIDWASH (Washer) WIPES PENDINGThis message displays when you turn on theheated windshield washer fluid system. See“Heated Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washeron page 166 for more information.

HOOD OPENIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closedproperly. When this message appears, make surethat the hood is closed completely. See HoodRelease on page 333.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the passenger’s dooris closed completely.

OIL LEVEL LOW ADD OILOn some vehicles, this message displays whenthe vehicle’s engine oil is low. Fill the oil to theproper level as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 334 for the engineoil fill location. Also, see Engine Oil on page 337 forinformation on the kind of oil to use and the properoil level.

224

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 337 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil pressure is low. The oil pressure light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster.See Oil Pressure Light on page 209.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible when this messageis displayed.

PARK ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has this feature, after the vehicle hasbeen started, this message will reminder the driverthat the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system has been turned off. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the DIC display. To turn the URPA systemback on, see “Park Assist” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 212. See Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 178 for more information.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the front passenger’sdoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the front passenger’sdoor is closed completely.

RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVEIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays while the Rainsense™ system is active.See Rainsense™ II Wipers on page 165 formore information.

225

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matchinga Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to yourvehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 95 and DIC Controlsand Displays on page 212 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays when the battery in theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs tobe replaced. To replace the battery, see “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 95.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays when the passenger’sside rear door is not closed properly. When thismessage appears, make sure that the passenger’sdoor is closed completely.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when the electronicsensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Have theclimate control system serviced by your dealerif you notice a drop in heating and air conditioningefficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 197 for more information.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer immediately.

226

SERVICE BRAKE ASSISTThis message displays if there is a problem with thebrake system. The brake system warning light andthe anti-lock brake system warning light may alsobe displayed on the instrument panel cluster. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 201 andAnti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 202for more information. If this happens, stop as soonas possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DICdisplay. If the message is displayed or appearsagain when you begin driving, the brake systemneeds service. See your dealer as soon aspossible. See Brakes on page 367 for moreinformation.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays if the ignition is on toinform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.Have the brake system serviced by your dealer assoon as possible. The brake system warninglight also appears on the instrument panel clusterwhen this message appears on the DIC. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 201.

SERVICE PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays if there is a problem with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do notuse this system to help you park. See UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 178 for moreinformation. See your dealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGYour vehicle may have a speed variable assiststeering system. See Steering on page 285.

This message displays if a problem is detected withthe speed variable assist steering system. Whenthis message is displayed, you may notice that theeffort required to steer the vehicle decreases orfeels lighter, but you will still be able to steer thevehicle.

227

SERVICE STABILITRAKIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays if there has been a problem detected withStabiliTrak®. A warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 202. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 284 for moreinformation.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition offand then back on. If this message still stays on orturns back on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak®

System inspected by your dealer as soon aspossible.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEMThis message displays to indicate that thesuspension system is not operating properly.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system programmed in thekey. A fault has been detected in the system whichmeans that the system is disabled and it is notprotecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts;however, you may want to take the vehicle toyour dealer before turning off the engine. SeePASS-Key® III+ on page 111 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, the warningcomes on in about 20 minutes. A sensor would bemissing, for example, if you put different wheels onyour vehicle without transferring the sensors. If thewarning comes on and stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPM. See your dealer.

228

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is not functioning properly. A warninglight also appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 202. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 283 for more information. Have the TCSserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transaxle. See your dealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays when your vehicle speed islimited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speed variable assiststeering, magnetic ride control, or automaticleveling control systems. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

STABILITRAK NOT READYIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message maydisplay and the Traction Control System andStabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panelcluster may be on after first driving the vehicleand exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.The StabiliTrak® system is not functional untilthe light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 284 for more information.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN, and will not disappear until the problemis resolved.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

229

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 110 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may be displayed if the gas cap isnot on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gascap to ensure that it is on properly. See Filling theTank on page 330 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 393. The tire positions must be re-learnedafter rotating the tires or after replacing a tireor sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 398 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 392for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 283 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 283 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays when the transaxle fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until it cools down. If the warningmessage continues to display, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

TRUNK OPENThis message displays when the trunk is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunk isclosed completely. See Trunk on page 106.

230

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn off theturn signal if you drive your vehicle for more thanabout 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. SeeTurn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 162.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. The message willnot disappear until the turn signal is manuallyturned off, or a turn is completed.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washerreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 334 for thelocation of the windshield washer reservoir. Also,see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 365 formore information.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle has customization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to onepreferred setting. Customization features can onlybe programmed to one setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to a preferred setting fortwo different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

231

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery,it is recommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, make sure thevehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DIC messagesappear to English.

Press the customization button until the PRESS V

TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto display all DIC messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following choices:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear inFrench.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Select one of the available choices and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

232

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 104for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’sdoors automatically lock when the doors areclosed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doorsautomatically lock when the vehicle speed isabove 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.


Select one of the available choices and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allowsyou to select which doors and when they willautomatically unlock. See Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks on page 104 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


233

Select one of the available choices and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it.

REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of thedoors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 95 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.

Select one of the available choices and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

234

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 95 for moreinformation.Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following choices:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.Select one of the available choices and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it.

DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not thelocking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. Thelocking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed for up to10 seconds after a power door lock switch ispressed when a door is open, or after the lockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed while a door is open. The keymust be out of the ignition for this feature to work.

Press the customization button until DELAY DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of thevehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by 10 seconds after a power doorlock switch is pressed when a door is open, or thelock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed whilea door is open.


235

Select one of the available choices and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allows youto select the amount of time you want the exteriorlamps to remain on. This happens after the key isturned from RUN to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly during lowlight periods after unlocking the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until thelock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, orthe vehicle is no longer off. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 95 for moreinformation.

236


Select one of the available choices and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to aloud level.



PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when the vehicle is shiftedinto REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View AssistMirror on page 134 for more information.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).

237



EASY EXIT SEATIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 13for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears in the display. Press the set/resetbutton to access the settings for this feature.Then press the customization button to scrollthrough the following choices:

OFF (default): No seat exit recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movement has alreadyoccurred, and you put the key back in the ignitionand remove it again, the seat will stay in the originalexit position, unless a memory recall took placeprior to removing the key again.



238

MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears in the display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF (default): No memory seat recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will automatically moveto the stored driving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed.



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turnthe remote start off or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine from outside of thevehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 95 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



239

FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the FEATURESETTINGS menu.

Press the customization button until FEATURESETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning ofthe FEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

240

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for a saferdriving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 276. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’s audiosystem, you can use it with less effort, as well astake advantage of its features. While your vehicleis parked, set up your audio system by presettingyour favorite radio stations, setting the tone andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoritestations using the presets and steering wheelcontrols if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 276.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

241

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 115 for more information.

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numbered onethrough six, the radio will have a clock button forsetting the time. You can set the time by followingthese steps:

1. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minute numberswill begin flashing on the display.

2. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time. Instead of using the tune knob,you can also press the SEEK, FWD (forward),or REV (reverse) buttons to adjust the time.

3. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing willstop after five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

242

To change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed, pressthe pushbutton located under the desired option toselect the default. Press the clock button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

243

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENU buttonand then the clock button when the radio is on. Thedate with display times out after a few seconds andgoes back to the normal radio and time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then the pushbuttonlocated under the forward arrow label. Oncethe time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

244

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio goes to the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canstill be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency and thetime. While the ignition is off, press this button todisplay the time.

245

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass ortreble, press the tune knob or the pushbuttonslocated under the BASS/TREB display, until thedesired tone control label displays. Turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the setting. Adjust the setting by pressingeither the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV (reverse)buttons. The current bass or treble level displays.If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static,decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual appears on the display or startto manually adjust the bass or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

246

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting. The setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD,or REV buttons.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Loc (Locked): This message displays while theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 273 for more information.

247

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is heldor pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this pushbutton to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

248

RDM (Random): With the random setting,you can listen to CD tracks in random, ratherthan sequential order. To use random, do thefollowing:

1. Press this button to play tracks from the CDyou are listening to in random order. Therandom icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off randomplay. The random icon disappears from thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

• To repeat the track you are listening to,press and release the RPT button. An arrowsymbol displays. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for a few seconds.An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again toturn off repeat play. When repeat is off, thesymbol no longer displays.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button toplay a CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays while a CD is in theplayer. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

249

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD ejects, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 276 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, press the radioCD/AUX button to begin playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

250

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown,Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar

251

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersdisplay. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way,the volume level should sound about the same asyou drive. To activate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM

(automatic volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

252

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrowfor a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrowagain to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) canappear. Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label displays.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is in PARK (P). Tuneto your favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls if the vehiclehas this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 276.

253

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available per page. Each pageof favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM,or XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station asa favorite, perform the following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released,the station that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setupusing the MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,to return to the original main radio screenshowing the radio station frequency labelsand to begin the process of programming yourfavorites for the chosen amount of numberedpages.

254

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. The highlightedsetting can also be adjusted by pressing either theSEEK, FWD (forward) or REV (reverse) buttonuntil the desired levels are obtained. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or has static, decrease thetreble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble)label for more than two seconds. A beep soundsand the level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance orfade, press the tune knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlighted setting can alsobe adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned underthe BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

255

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

256

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Locked: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 269 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button for twoseconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

257

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 273 for more information.



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.


Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player andbegin playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

258

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrowis held, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward throughthe tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be played in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot of theCD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD in randomorder, press the pushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until Random Current Discdisplays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-discCD player, press and hold the LOAD button.A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into the slotof the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

259

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button toplay a CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, No Aux Input Device Founddisplays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, seeUsing an MP3 on page 262 later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

260

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 276 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, press the radioCD/AUX button to begin playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe volume of the portable player. You might needto make additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, soyou might want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing. Pressthis button again and the system begins playingaudio from the connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected, No AuxInput Device Found displays.

261

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen files are recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressed audioformat.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure the CD does not have more than50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files to readand play.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

262

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlistsor sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files, the player lets you access and navigateup to the maximum, but all items over the maximumcannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessed priorto any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)are always accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder is not numbered ordisplayed.

263

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder functions do not function on a CD-Rthat was recorded without folders or playlists. Whendisplaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons searches playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

264

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. The display does not showparts of words on the last page of text and theextension of the filename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, you do nothave playlist editing capability using the radio.These playlists are treated as special folderscontaining compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), labelside up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R shouldbegin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD-R starts to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size CD-Rsand the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 273 for more information.

265



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed.If the CD-R is not removed, after several seconds,the CD-R automatically pulls back into the playerand begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player,press and hold the eject button for two seconds toeject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through MP3 files onthe CD.

266

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files can be played on the CD-R in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do oneof the following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order byartist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio might beginplaying while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, theCD-R begins playing again.

267

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3 files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line of thedisplay between the arrows. Once all songs by thatartist are played, the player moves to the next artistin alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listento MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album begins to play. Onceall songs from that album have played, the playermoves to the next album in alphabetical order onthe CD-R and begins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button toplay a CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, No Aux Input Device Founddisplays.

268

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/ProgramTitle not available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

269

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theft Locked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messagedisplays after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

270

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can never replaceyour own judgment. See the Navigation Systemmanual for some tips to help you reducedistractions while driving.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret codeto disable all radio functions whenever batterypower is removed and the radio is placed in adifferent vehicle. This feature requires no user inputto be activated. The radio is automatically armedwhen it is put into the vehicle for the first time.

If THEFTLOCK® is activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED.If this occurs, the radio will need to be returnedto your GM dealer.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has audiosteering wheel controls,they may be differdepending on yourvehicle’s options. Someaudio controls can beadjusted at the steeringwheel. They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

271

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the system. Press andrelease this button again, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system,press and hold this button for longer than onesecond to initiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the Navigation System manual formore information.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to interact withthe OnStar system. If your vehicle is also equippedwith the navigation system, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to initiate voicerecognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®

mode. See the OnStar® System on page 135 inthis manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, andAUX jack (if equipped).

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station, or CD, whichever is the activesource and stay there.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations willboost the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

272

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of theXM™ signal for a period of time. The radio maydisplay NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly or not at all. If thesurface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

273

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. The metallic film insome tinting materials will interfere withor distort the incoming radio reception. Anydamage caused to your antenna due to metallictinting materials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damage therear window antenna and/or the rear windowdefogger. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not clear the inside rear windowwith sharp objects.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged. Make surethe cellular telephone antenna does not touch agrid line.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

274

Your Driving, the Road, and YourVehicle ..................................................... 276Defensive Driving ...................................... 276Drunken Driving ........................................ 277Control of a Vehicle .................................. 280Braking ...................................................... 280Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 281Braking in Emergencies ............................. 283Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 283StabiliTrak® System ................................... 284Panic Brake Assist .................................... 285Steering .................................................... 285Off-Road Recovery .................................... 288Passing ..................................................... 288Loss of Control .......................................... 290Driving at Night ......................................... 291

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 293City Driving ............................................... 296Freeway Driving ........................................ 297Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 298Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 299Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 300Winter Driving ........................................... 302If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 306Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 307Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 307

Towing ........................................................ 313Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 313Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 313Towing a Trailer ........................................ 315

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

275

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 19.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

276

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

277

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

278

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC mightnot be able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

279

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 283.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 325.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 201.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

280

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 202.

281

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

282

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system that limitswheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery roadconditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat the front wheels are spinning too much orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem works the front brakes and reduces enginepower (by closing the throttle and managing enginespark) to limit wheel spin.

The traction control system and StabiliTrak®

warning light will flash when the traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 202 formore information. You may feel or hear the systemworking, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safely useit again, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 167 for moreinformation.

283

The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message,the traction control system warning light andthe StabiliTrak® warning light will come on to letyou know if there is a problem with the tractioncontrol system. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 221.

When this light and the SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL message are on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automaticallycomes on whenever you start your vehicle.To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the systemon. But you can turn the traction control system offif you ever need to.

You can turn the system on or off at any time bypressing the traction control system button locatedon the console. The DIC will display TRACTIONCONTROL OFF when you press the button.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 325 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may have this feature. TheStabiliTrak® system is an advanced computercontrolled system that helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in difficult drivingconditions. This is accomplished by selectivelyapplying any one of the vehicle’s brakes andreducing engine power. The StabiliTrak® systemcomes on automatically whenever you startyour vehicle. The system cannot be turned off.

The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may bedisplayed in the DIC and the traction control systemand StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will be on after first driving the vehicleand exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.The StabiliTrak® system is off until the light hasturned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.

The traction control system and StabiliTrak®

warning light on the instrument panel cluster willflash when the system is operating. See TractionControl System (TCS) Warning Light on page 202,StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on page 203 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 221 for moreinformation. You may also feel or hear the systemworking. This is normal.

284

The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will bedisplayed and the traction control systemand StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will come on if there is a problem withthe system. When this light and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are on, the system is notoperational. Adjust your driving accordingly.

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle may have a panic brake assist systemthat monitors the intention of the driver whilebraking. If the system senses that the driver hasapplied hard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, thesystem will generate additional pressure, making iteasier for the driver to maintain brake application.When this happens the brake pedal will feel easierto push. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly andlet the system work for you. You may feel thebrakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise butthis is normal. The brakes will return to normaloperation after the brake pedal has been released.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

285

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demandtoo much of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 283and StabiliTrak® System on page 284.

What should you do if this ever happens?Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehiclethe way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will want to goslower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


286

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 280. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

287

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

288

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

289

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

290

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

291

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

292

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction.

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

293

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

294

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 385.

295

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 297.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

296

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

297

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you caneasily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

298

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflatedto the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should you delayyour trip a short time to avoid a major stormsystem?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

299

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

300

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gearpossible.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

301

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 385.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

302

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.

But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), itwill improve your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. Even if your vehicle hasTCS you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, suchas when driving through deep snow and loosegravel, to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 283.

If you do not have TCS, accelerate gently. Try notto break the fragile traction. If you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

303

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 281.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

304

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it goa little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

305

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting the transaxleback and forth, you can destroy the transaxle.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 307.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 406.

306

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you should turnthe traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 283. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) anda forward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 313.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry; the Tireand Loading Information label and theCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

307

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 385 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 392.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; seeCertification Label later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicleplacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

308

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 315 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

309


A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)


AVehicle CapacityWeight forExample 3 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Example 2 Example 3

310

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

311

If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else, they will goas fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Automatic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle levelas the load changes. It is automatic, you donot need to adjust anything. This type of levelcontrol is fully automatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well as better handlingunder a variety of passenger and loadingconditions. An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower the rear of thevehicle to maintain proper vehicle height.The system is activated when the ignition key isturned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicleheight thereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up to ten minutes afterthe ignition key has been turned to OFF. You mayalso hear the air compressor operating whenthe height is being adjusted.

312

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 466.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 298.

313

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” that follows for more information.

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

314

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identify thetrailering capacity of your vehicle, you should readthe information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. Trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Traileringmeans changes in handling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced towork harder against the drag of the added weight.The engine is required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greater loads, generatingextra heat. Also, the trailer adds considerably towind resistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

315

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• The weight of the trailer.

• The weight of the trailer tongue.

• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedform the maximum trailer weight.

316

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengers,or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.

And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 307 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

317

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You will find these numbers onthe Tire-Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307. Then be sure you do notgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If you donot seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 127. Dirtand water can also enter the vehicle.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you will be able to install, adjust andmaintain them properly.

Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try totap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

318

Trailer Wiring HarnessAll of the electrical circuits required for your trailerlighting system can be accessed at the driver’sside rear lamp connector. This connector is locatedunder the carpet on the rear corner of the trunkcompartment.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, becausethe vehicle is a good deal longer, you will need togo much farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

319

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, if possible, havesomeone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers youare about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It is important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When youplug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle’slighting system, its bulb warning lights may notlet you know if one of your lamps goes out.So, when you have a trailer lighting systemplugged in, be sure to check your vehicle andtrailer lamps from time to time to be sure they areall working. Once you disconnect the trailerlamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you ifone of your vehicle lamps is out.

320

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down to THIRD (3)and reduce your speed to around 45 mph(70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine andtransaxle overheating.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, hereis how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

321

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 351.

322

Service ........................................................ 325Accessories and Modifications ................... 325California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 326Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 326Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 327Fuel ............................................................. 327

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 327Gasoline Specifications .............................. 328California Fuel ........................................... 328Additives ................................................... 328Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 329Filling the Tank ......................................... 330Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 332

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 332Hood Release ........................................... 333Engine Compartment Overview .................. 334Engine Oil ................................................. 337Engine Oil Life System .............................. 340Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 342Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 343Engine Coolant .......................................... 347Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 351Engine Overheating ................................... 351

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ..................................... 353

Cooling System (3.8L V6 Engine) .............. 354Cooling System (4.6L V8 Engine) .............. 360Power Steering Fluid ................................. 364Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 365Brakes ...................................................... 367Battery ...................................................... 370Jump Starting ............................................ 372

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 377Bulb Replacement ....................................... 380

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 380Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................. 380Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps .................. 382License Plate Lamp ................................... 383Replacement Bulbs ................................... 383

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 383Tires ............................................................ 385

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 386Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 389Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 392Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 393

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

323

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 398When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 400Buying New Tires ...................................... 400Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 402Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 402Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 404Wheel Replacement .................................. 404Tire Chains ............................................... 406If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 407Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 408Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 409Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ......................... 410Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 416Compact Spare Tire .................................. 418

Appearance Care ........................................ 418Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 418Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 420Leather ...................................................... 421Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 421Care of Safety Belts .................................. 422Weatherstrips ............................................ 422

Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 422Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 422Finish Care ............................................... 423Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 423Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 424Tires ......................................................... 424Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 425Finish Damage .......................................... 425Underbody Maintenance ............................ 425Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 425Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 426

Vehicle Identification .................................. 427Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 427Service Parts Identification Label ............... 427

Electrical System ........................................ 428Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 428Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 428Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 428Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 428Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 431

Capacities and Specifications .................... 436

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

324

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GMvehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

325

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 478.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 86.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 455.

326

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 427.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine (VINCode 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octanerating is less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VINCode Y), use premium unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher. You may alsouse regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration maybe slightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, youmay notice a heavy knocking noise when youdrive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If youare using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.

327

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 328 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 206. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is caused bythe type of fuel used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

328

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

329

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the centerof the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring init; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

330

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 422.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fullyinstalled. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 206.

The vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 206.

331

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

332

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handleinside the vehicle. Itis located next to theparking brake pedalnear the floor.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pullthe secondary hood release to the right. Thehood latch is located under the hood, nearthe center, at the front edge of the grille.

3. Hold the latch to the right as you lift upon the hood.Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then just pull thehood down and close it firmly.

333

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.8L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

334

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 351.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 365.

C. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. SeeJump Starting on page 372.

D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 428.

E. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Index.F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).

See Power Steering Fluid on page 364.G. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Index.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 337.

I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 337.

J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 343.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 367.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 342.

335

When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

336

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 428.

B. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. SeeJump Starting on page 372.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 365.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Index.E. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 364.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil on page 337.G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 337.H. Brake Master Cylinder. See “Brake Fluid” under

Brakes on page 367.I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Cap and Dipstick

(Out of View). See Automatic TransaxleFluid on page 343.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 342.

Engine OilIf the OIL LEVEL LOW ADD OIL messageappears in the Driver Information Center (DIC), itmeans you need to check the engine oil levelright away. For more information, see DICWarnings and Messages on page 221. You shouldcheck the engine oil level regularly; this is anadded reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 334for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

337

When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you will need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 436.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 334 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

3.8L V6 Engine

4.6L V8 Engine

338

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

339

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 221. Change your oil assoon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life system maynot indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system. It is also important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

340

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message being turned on, reset thesystem.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not reset itself. To resetthe Engine Oil Life System, do the following:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button onthe DIC for more than five seconds. The oillife will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theEngine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

341

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 334for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 442 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Loosen and remove the two screws on thetop of the engine air cleaner/filter cover.

2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at anangle while pulling toward you. This isnecessary due to the two hinges located onthe inboard side of the cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter elementand any loose debris that may be found in theair cleaner base.

4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.

342

Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to theengine air cleaner/filter housing:

1. Align the two hinges located on the inboardside of the cover.

2. Push the cover slightly down and towards theengine to engage the tabs in the hinges andalign the two screws.

3. Tighten the two screws on the top of theengine air cleaner/filter housing cover.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inScheduled Maintenance on page 442, and besure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.

343

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluid (3.8L Engine)Because this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage the transaxle. Too much can mean thatsome of the fluid could come out and fall on hotengine or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transaxle tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading ifyou check the transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

344

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

For the 3.8L V6 enginethe transaxle fluiddipstick top is a roundloop with this symbol.See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 334 for moreinformation on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

3.8L V6 Engine

345

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 452.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluid (4.6L Engine)For the 4.6L V8 engine, it is not necessary to checkthe transaxle fluid level. A transaxle fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take yourvehicle to the dealership service department andhave it repaired as soon as possible.

346

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 351.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

347

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 452 for more information.

348

Checking Coolant (3.8L V6 Engine)

This symbol is locatedon the cap of the enginecoolant recovery tank.

The engine coolant recovery tank is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 334 for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atFULL COLD or a little higher. When your engineis warm, the level should raise.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burnyou badly. With the coolant recovery tank,you will almost never have to add coolantat the radiator. Never turn the radiatorpressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol, and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spill coolant on ahot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.For information on how to add coolant to theradiator, see Index. When replacing the pressurecap, make sure to turn cap until it clicks.

349

Checking Coolant (4.6L V8 Engine)

The engine coolantsurge tank is locatedtoward the rear ofthe engine compartmenton the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

For more information on location, see EngineCompartment Overview on page 334.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark, located on the side ofthe surge tank that faces the engine.

350

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Index. When replacing thepressure cap, make sure to turn cap until it clicks.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is apressure-type cap and must be tightlyinstalled to prevent coolant loss and possibleengine damage from overheating. Be surethe arrows on the cap line up with the overflowtube on the radiator filler neck.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 334for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a warning light about a hot engine aswell as an engine coolant temperature gage onyour vehicle’s instrument panel cluster.

351

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 353 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 353 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

352

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and themessage ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINEis displayed, an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, you willnotice a loss in power and engine performance.This operating mode allows your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place in an emergency. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheatedengine protection operating mode, to avoidengine damage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 337.

353

Cooling System (3.8L V6 Engine)When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Radiator Pressure CapB. Coolant Recovery TankC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above theFULL COLD mark when the engine is cold. Thecoolant level should be above the FULL COLDmark under normal operating conditions. If it is not,you may have a leak at the pressure cap or inthe radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

354

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.


may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

355

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:


Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

If you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 347for more information.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

356

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure capwhen the cooling system, including theradiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose,is no longer hot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Removethe pressure cap.

357

3. Remove the 3800 Series II V6 engine covershield to access the bleed valve.

3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil filltube and cap before removing. Twistthe oil fill tube, with cap attached,counterclockwise and remove it.

3.2. Lift the engine cover shield at the front,slide the catch tab out of the enginebracket and remove the cover shield.

3.3. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, inthe valve cover oil fill hole until you areready to replace the cover shield.

4. After the enginecools, open thecoolant air bleedvalve. There is onebleed valve. It islocated on thethermostat housing.

5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 347for more information about the proper coolantmixture.If you see a stream of coolant coming from anair bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise,close the valve after the radiator is filled.

6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

358

7. Replace the 3800 Series II V6 engine covershield.

7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with capattached, from the valve cover.

7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shieldunder the bracket on the engine.

7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield overthe hole in the valve cover. Install oil filltube and cap by twisting clockwise.

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL COLD mark.

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

10. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.

11. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the arrow on the pressurecap lines up properly.

359

Cooling System (4.6L V8 Engine)When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

360

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 353 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.


may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the level is not at the FULL COLDmark located on the side of the surge tank,add enough of a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank to bring the level to the FULL COLDmark, but be sure the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap (if equipped), iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 347 for more information.

361

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:


362

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

You can remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap when the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If you hear a hiss, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.

363

3. Fill the coolantsurge tank with theproper mixtureto the FULL COLDmark on theside of the coolantsurge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start theengine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank until the levelreaches the FULL COLD mark on the side ofthe coolant surge tank.

5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 334 forinformation on thelocation of the powersteering fluid reservoir.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

364

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

365

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 334for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

366

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 334 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 201.

367

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 452.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 422.

368

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

369

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example,when your brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get newapproved GM replacement parts. If you do not,your brakes may no longer work properly.For example, if someone puts in brake linings thatare wrong for your vehicle, the balance betweenyour front and rear brakes can change — forthe worse. The braking performance you havecome to expect can change in many other waysif someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

The battery is located under the rear seat cushion.To access the battery, see “Removing the RearSeat Cushion” under Rear Underseat FuseBlock on page 431. You do not need to accessthe battery to jump start your vehicle. SeeJump Starting on page 372.

370

{CAUTION:

A battery that is not properly vented canlet sulfuric acid fumes into the area underthe rear seat cushion. These fumes candamage your rear seat safety beltsystems. You may not be able to see thisdamage, and the safety belts might notprovide the protection needed in a crash.If a replacement battery is ever needed, itmust be vented in the same manner asthe original battery. Always make surethat the vent hose is properly reattachedbefore reinstalling the seat cushion.

To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached,the vent hose connectors (B) must be securelyreattached to the vent outlets (C) on each side ofthe battery, and the vent assembly grommet (D)must be secured to the floor pan (E).

371

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 372 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 271.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

372

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet(s). Turn off the radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoid sparks andhelp save both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

373

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not see the battery of your vehicleunder the hood. It is located under therear passenger’s seat. You will not need toaccess the battery for jump starting. Theremote positive (+) terminal is for that purpose.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 334 for location.

Access the remote positive (+) terminal byremoving the cover.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.


374


But if a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

375

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) TerminalB. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and

Remote Negative (−) TerminalsC. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or

Remote Negative (−) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

376

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal coverto its original position.

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim of the headlamps have beenpreset at the factory and should need no furtheradjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the aim of the headlamps may be affected andadjustment may be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may mean the vertical aim of yourheadlamps needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to beadjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described in the following procedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared asfollows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• The spare tire is in its proper location in thevehicle.

377

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 333 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to theaim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallthe width of the vehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

378

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. Do not placedirectly on the headlamp. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlamp beingadjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm male hex.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

379

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 383.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Sidemarker Lamps

A. Sidemarker LampB. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

380

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 106for more information.

2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehiclehas one.

3. Remove the plastic wing nuts retaining thetrunk trim.

4. Pull back the trunk trim.

5. Remove the three hex nuts holding thetaillamp assembly in place.

6. Pull out the taillamp assembly.

7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it straight out to remove it.

8. Replace the old bulb with a new one.

9. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.

10. Reverse these steps to reinstall the taillampassembly.When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, makesure the plastic pin on the taillamp assemblylines up and is inserted correctly into theopening of the vehicle.

381

Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps

A. TaillampB. Back-up Lamp

To replace an auxiliary taillamp or back-up lampbulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 106 formore information.

2. Remove the three fasteners from thetrunk trim.

3. Pull back the trunk trim to access the bulbs.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it.

5. Pull the bulb straight out.

6. Replace the bulb and reinstall it in theassembly by turning it clockwise.

382

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the license plate.

2. Reach up through the opening above thelicense plate to access the two licenseplate lamps.

3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove.

4. Grasp the bulb in the socket and pullstraight out.

5. Push the bulb straight into the socket until itclicks to secure it.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thebulb socket.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamps Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp 921Sidemarker, License Plate Lamp,and Auxiliary Taillamp 194

Stoplamp, Taillamp, and TurnSignal Lamp 3057K

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 442.

It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.For proper windshield wiper blade length andtype, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 453.

383

To replace the wiper blade assembly, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, with theengine off.

2. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away fromthe windshield.

3. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiperblade assembly and slide the assembly offthe end of the wiper arm.

4. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damagethat occurs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

5. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.

384

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 307.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 392.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

385

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

386

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 402.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 418 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 407.

Compact Spare Tire Example

387

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 392.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

388

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

389

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 392.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 307.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 307.

390

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 392 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 400.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 402.

391

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

392

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 307. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 418.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressure levels. TheTPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, except for the spare tire.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

393

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehiclehas the Driver Information Center (DIC), the drivermay also check tire pressure levels using theDIC buttons located on the instrument panel.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol, located on the instrument panelcluster, and at the same time a message to checkthe pressure in a specific tire will also appear onthe DIC display. The low tire pressure warningsymbol on the instrument panel cluster andthe CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning messageon the DIC display will appear at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Controls and Displays on page 212 andDIC Warnings and Messages on page 221.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the tire pressure monitor light, located onthe instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message will appear when thevehicle is first started and the turn off as you start

to drive the vehicle. This could be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures are getting lowand need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

394

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307,for an example of the tire information label andits location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 392.

395

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about alow tire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 398 and Tires on page 385.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.If the system detects a missing or inoperablesensor, an error message SERVICE TIREMONITOR SYSTEM will be shown on the DICdisplay. If you have replaced a tire/wheel assemblywithout transferring the TPMS sensors, the errormessage will be displayed. Once you re-install theTPMS sensors, the error message should gooff. See your GM dealer for service if all TPMSsensors are installed and the error messagecomes on and stays on.

Resetting the TPMS SensorIdentification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched, to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’sside front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your GM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match each tire andwheel position. If it takes longer than two minutes tomatch any tire and wheel position, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tire and wheelpositions the matching process stops and you willneed to start over.

396

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the LEARN TIRE POSITIONSmessage displays.

4. Press the set/reset button to allow the systemto learn the tire positions. The horn will soundtwice to indicate the receiver is ready, andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagewill display. The TPMS system is ready forthe sensor matching process to begin.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.The horn chirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirms that thesensor identification code has been matchedto the tire/wheel position. To decrease thetire’s air-pressure use the pointed end of thevalve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage,or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, the tire learning processends. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The compact spare tire and wheel assemblydoes not have a TPMS sensor. If you replaceone of the road tires with the compact spare tire,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMmessage will be displayed on the DIC displayscreen. This message should go off onceyou re-install the road tire containing theTPMS sensor.

397

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules and is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:




Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 400and Wheel Replacement on page 404 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 442 for scheduled rotationintervals.

398

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shownon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 392 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See“TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 393.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 436.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 408.

399

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.

400

If the tires have an all-season tread design, theTPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 386 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 418.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

401

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 400 andAccessories and Modifications on page 325 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

402

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conform tofederal safety requirements and additional GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

403

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

404

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 408 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

405

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P235/55R17, orP245/50R18 size tires, do not use tirechains. There is not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions.



Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, anddo not spin your vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has P225/60R16 sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class S-typechains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

406

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to usethe jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

407

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 160 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).3. Turn off the engine and do not restart

while the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.



To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. That would be thetire, on the other side, at the opposite endof the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

408

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in thetrunk.

1. If your vehicle has acenter retainer, turnit counterclockwiseto remove it.

2. Lift and remove the compact spare tire cover.

3. Remove the washer and retainer that holdsdown the jack and wheel wrench.

4. Remove the jack container with the jack andthe wheel wrench.

5. Remove the spare tire from the vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 418 for moreinformation.

409

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and the wheel wrench (B).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Place the wheel wrench securely over thewheel nut. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen all the wheel nuts,but do no remove them yet.

410

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise thejack lift head.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

3. Put the jack into the flange in the frame whichis located near each wheel well. The flangesare accessible through openings in theplastic trim at the bottom of the vehicle. Thefront opening is about 8 inches (20 cm)back from the front wheel well. The rearopening is about 3 inches (8 cm) forward fromthe rear wheel well.

411

4. Position the jack and raise the jack headuntil it fits firmly on the ridge in the vehicle’sframe nearest the flat tire. Do not raisethe vehicle yet.

5. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack. 6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle

clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

412

7. Remove all wheelnuts and take off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,



remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

8. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

413

9. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

10. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub. 11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

414

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 436for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 436 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

12. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put the wheel cover on the compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

415

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After you have put the compact spare tire on yourvehicle, you need to store the flat tire in yourtrunk. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunkas possible.

To store the compact spare tire and tools, do thefollowing:

416

A. Center RetainerB. Compact Spare Tire CoverC. RetainerD. WasherE. Jack ContainerF. Spare TireG. Wheel WrenchH. JackI. Foam InsertJ. Bolt

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 106 formore information.

2. Make sure the foam insert (I) is in place in thetrunk compartment.

3. Reinstall the compact spare tire (F) makingsure to line up the wheel center hole with thebolt (J). Then place it on the compartmentfloor.

4. Insert the jack container (E) into the sparetire (F).

5. Insert the wheel wrench (G) and jack (H) intothe center of the compact spare tire makingsure to line up the wheel nut hole withthe bolt (I) on the compartment floor.

6. Secure the compact spare tire and the jackcontainer (E) with the washer (D) and theretainer (C).

7. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (B).

8. Secure with the center retainer (A).

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 418 for more information.

417

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

418

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

419

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

420

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

421

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 426. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 422.

422

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 426.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

423

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

424

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can develop

on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame,floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

425

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

426

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on your spare tire cover. Itis very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

427

Electrical SystemAdd-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 86.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the rear fuse block protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

You will find a fuse puller clipped in both of thefuse blocks. Snap the wide end of the fuse pullerat the side indentations and pull the fuse out.

The MaxiFuses are located in two fuse blocks,one located in the engine compartment onthe passenger’s side and the other under the rearseat on the driver’s side. If a MaxiFuse shouldblow, have your vehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the engine compartment.Remove the fuse cover and secondary servicecover to access the fuse block.

428

Fuses UsageF1 SpareF2 Driver’s Side Low-BeamF3 Passenger’s Side Low-Beam

Fuses UsageF4 Airbag IgnitionF5 Engine Control ModuleF6 Transaxle Ignition

429

Fuses UsageF7 SpareF8 SpareF9 Spare

F10 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

F11 Driver’s Side High-Beam HeadlampF12 Windshield Washer PumpF13 Spare

F14 Climate Controls, Instrument PanelCluster

F15 SpareF16 Fog LampsF17 HornF18 Windshield WiperF19 Driver’s Side Corner LampF20 Passenger’s Side Corner LampF21 Oxygen SensorF22 Powertrain

F23 Engine Control Module (ECM),Crank

F24 Injector CoilF25 Injector CoilF26 Air ConditioningF27 Air Solenoid

Fuses Usage

F28 Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module (ECM/TCM)

F29 SpareF30 SpareF31 SpareF32 Spare

J-Case Fuse UsageJC1 Heated Windshield WasherJC2 Cooling Fan 1JC3 SpareJC4 CrankJC5 Cooling Fan 2JC6 Anti-lock Brake System 2JC7 Anti-lock Brake System 1JC8 Air Pump

Relays UsageR1 Cooling Fan 1R2 Cooling FanR3 CrankR4 PowertrainR5 Spare

430

Relays UsageR6 Run/CrankR7 Cooling Fan 2R8 Windshield WiperR9 Air PumpR10 Windshield Wiper HighR11 Air ConditioningR12 Air Solenoid

Rear Underseat Fuse BlockThe rear fuse block is located under the rear seaton the driver’s side. The rear seat cushionmust be removed to access the rear fuse block.

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion

Notice: If you touch the exposed wires withthe metal on the seat cushion, you could causea short that could damage the battery and orwires. Avoid contact between the rear seat andthe fuse center whenever you remove orreinstall the rear seat. Do not remove coversfrom any of the covered parts, and do not storeanything under the seats.

To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to releasethe front hooks.

2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. To access the fuse block, pull out and lift upon the cover latch, located at the end of thefuse block, near the battery cable.

431

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly routedthrough the seat cushion or is twisted willnot provide the protection needed in acrash. If the safety belt has not been



routed through the seat cushion at all, itwill not be there to work for the nextpassenger. The person sitting in thatposition could be badly injured. Afterreinstalling the seat cushion, alwayscheck to be sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and are not twisted.

1. Buckle the center passenger position safetybelt, then route the safety belts through theproper slots in the seat cushion. Do not let thesafety belts get twisted.

2. Slide the rear of the cushion down and underthe seatback.

3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearwardand then press down on the front of the seatcushion until the front hooks on both endsengage.

4. Check to make sure the safety belts areproperly routed and that no portion of anysafety belt is trapped under the seat. Pullup on the front of the seat cushion to makesure it is secured.

432

J-Case Fuses UsageJC1 Climate Control FanJC2 Rear Defogger

JC3 Electronic LevelingControl/Compressor

Fuses UsageF1 Amplifier (Option)F2 Not UsedF3 Interior Lamps

433

Fuses Usage

F4 Courtesy/Passenger Side Front TurnSignal

F5 Canister Vent

F6 Magnetic Ride Control Module(Option)

F7 Leveling CompressorF8 Not UsedF9 Not UsedF10 Switch DimmerF11 Fuel PumpF12 Body Control Module LogicF13 AirbagF14 Accessory Power OutletsF15 Driver’s Side Turn SignalF16 Passenger Side Rear Turn SignalF17 Sunroof

F18 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Back-up Lamps

F19 Rear Door LocksF20 Not UsedF21 Radio, S-BandF22 OnStar® (Option)F23 Accessory Power OutletF24 Driver Door Module

Fuses UsageF25 Passenger Door ModuleF26 Trunk ReleaseF27 Heated/Cooled Seats (Option)

F28 Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module (ECM/TCM)

F29 Regulated Voltage Control SenseF30 Daytime Running LampsF31 Instrument Panel Harness ModuleF32 Not UsedF33 Not UsedF34 Steering Wheel IlluminationF35 Body Harness Module

F36 Memory Seat Module LogicMassage (Option)

F37 Object Detection Sensor (Option)F38 Not UsedF40 Shifter Solenoid

F41 Retained Accessory Power,Miscellaneous

F42 Driver’s Side Park LampF43 Passenger’s Side Park LampF44 Heated Steering Wheel (Option)F45 Not UsedF46 Not Used

434

Fuses Usage

F47 Heated/Cooled Seats, Ignition 3(Option)

F48 Ignition SwitchF49 Not Used

CircuitBreakers Usage

CB1 Front Passenger’s Seat, MemorySeat Module

CB2 Driver’s Power Seat, Memory SeatModule

CB3 Door Module, Power WindowsCB4 Not Used

Resistor UsageF39 Terminating Resistor

Relays UsageR1 Retained Accessory PowerR2 Park LampsR3 Run (Option)R4 Daytime Running LampsR5 Not UsedR6 Trunk ReleaseR7 Fuel PumpR8 Not UsedR9 Door LockR10 Door UnlockR11 Not UsedR12 Not UsedR13 Not UsedR14 Rear Defogger

R15 Electronic Leveling ControlCompressor

435

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 452 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transaxle- Drain and Refill

3.8L V6 Engine 7.4 qt 7.0L

4.6L V8 Engine 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Engine Cooling System

3.8L V6 Engine 11.8 qt 11.2 L

4.6L V8 Engine 12.7 qt 12.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter



436

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

3.8L Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME, VT,NY, MA (see your dealer for bordering states) 18.0 gal 68.1 L

3.8L Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all otherstates (see your dealer for more information) 18.5 gal 70.0 L

4.6L Engines sold new in all states 18.5 gal 70.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.8L V6 2 Automatic 0.060 in (1.52 mm)

4.6L V8 Y Automatic 0.050 in (1.27 mm)

437

✍ NOTES

438

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 440Introduction ............................................... 440Maintenance Requirements ........................ 440Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 440Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 440Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 442Additional Required Services ..................... 444Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 446

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 448At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 448At Least Once a Month ............................. 449At Least Once a Year ............................... 449Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 452Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 453Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 454Maintenance Record .................................. 455

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

439

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties. Seeyour Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet oryour dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance may not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do notknow exactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week. Oryou may drive long distances all the time in veryhot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle inmaking deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to doerrands, or in many other ways.

440

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.This schedule is for vehicles that:• carry passengers and cargo within

recommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 307.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 327.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 442 should be performed when indicated. SeeAdditional Required Services on page 444 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 446 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

441

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 478.

Owner Checks and Services on page 448 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 452 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 453.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagein the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the system must be reset.Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trainedservice technicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 340 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

442

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 337. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 340. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 342. See footnote (m). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 398 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 449.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

443

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •3.8L Engine Only: Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

444

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 342. • • •

V8 Engine Only: Throttle body service.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnotes † and (l).

• • • • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

V6 Engine Only: Inspect spark plugwires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (j).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (n).

•

445

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

446

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for the hood,rear compartment, glove box door, and consoledoor. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 347 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates fordeposits. Open the throttle valve and inspectall surfaces. Clean as required.

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

447

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 452.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 337 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper level cancause damage to your engine not covered byyour warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 347 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

448

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 392. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 408.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 398.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 122.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

449

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 122.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

450

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

451

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 337.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 347.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

452

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter

3.8L V6 Engine 25010792 PF47

4.6L V8 Engine 89017342 PF61

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15811562 CF138

Spark Plugs

3.8L V6 12568387 41-101

4.6L V8 12571535 41-987

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side – 23.6 inches (60.0 cm) 15788730 —

Passenger’s Side – 20.8 inches (53.0 cm) 15788731 —

453

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.8L V6 Engine

4.6L V8 Engine

454

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 440. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 448 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

455

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



456




457




458

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 460Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 460Online Owner Center ................................. 463Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 464Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 464GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 465Roadside Assistance Program ................... 466Courtesy Transportation ............................. 469Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 471Collision Damage Repair ........................... 472

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 477Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 477Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 477Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 478Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 478

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

459

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Buick. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourGM dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the BuickCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free numberin order to give your inquiry prompt attention.Please have the following information available togive the Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number.This is available from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel.

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Buick, please rememberthat your concern will likely be resolved at adealer’s facility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if you have a concern.

460

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, in the United States, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two, youshould file with the BBB Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

461

STEP THREE — Canadian Owner: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps one and two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program atthe following address. Your inquiry shouldbe accompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

462

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

463

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who useText Telephones (TTYs), Buick has TTYequipment available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user can communicate withBuick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesBuick encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Buick, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceBuick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

www.Buick.com1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

464

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

465

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S. call 1-800-252-1112.

In Canada call 1-800-268-6800.

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the proud owner of a new Buick vehicle, youare automatically enrolled in the RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

466

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition will be covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

467

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Buick’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty for U.S.customers, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs are theresponsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber, and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callBuick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112,TTY users, call 1-888-889-2438, Canadiancustomers call 1-800-268-6800.

Buick and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Buick and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

468

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

469

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

470

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to

help the driver control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. Some information may be storedduring regular operations to facilitate repair ofdetected malfunctions; other information is storedonly in a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

471

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

472

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

473

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it bya police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 466 for moreinformation.

474

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need.If they ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select aGM dealer or a private collision repair facilityto fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, you willhave to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

475

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

476

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

477

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us.

Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

478

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

479

✍ NOTES

480

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 325Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 181Additives, Fuel ............................................ 328Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 428Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 342Air Conditioning .................................. 182, 186Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 198Readiness Light ....................................... 197

Airbag Sensing andDiagnostic Module (SDM) ......................... 471

Airbag System ............................................... 70Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 87How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 79Passenger Sensing System ....................... 81Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 86What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 78What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 79When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 76Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 72

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 281Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 202

Appearance CareAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 424Care of Safety Belts ................................ 422Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 425Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 422Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 418Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 420Finish Care .............................................. 423Finish Damage ......................................... 425Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 421Leather .................................................... 421Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 425Tires ........................................................ 424Underbody Maintenance ........................... 425Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 426Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 422Weatherstrips ........................................... 422Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 423

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 182Audio System(s) .......................................... 241

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 271Backglass Antenna ................................... 274Care of Your CD Player ........................... 274Care of Your CDs .................................... 273

481

Audio System(s) (cont.)Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 271Radio with CD ................................ 245, 251Setting the Time .............................. 242, 243Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 271Understanding Radio Reception ............... 272XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 274

Automatic TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 343Operation ................................................. 119

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 274Battery ........................................................ 370

Electric Power Management ..................... 176Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 173Inadvertent Power Saver .......................... 177Run-Down Protection ............................... 177

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 298Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 281Emergencies ............................................ 283Panic Assist ............................................. 285Parking .................................................... 122System Warning Light .............................. 201

Brakes ........................................................ 367Braking ....................................................... 280Braking in Emergencies ............................... 283Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 113Bulb Replacement ....................................... 380

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 380Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 377License Plate Lamps ................................ 383Replacement Bulbs .................................. 383Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps ................. 382Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................ 380Buying New Tires ........................................ 400

482

CCalibration .......................... 19, 130, 132, 218California Fuel ............................................. 328California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 326Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 436Carbon Monoxide .............. 106, 127, 302, 315Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 422Your CD Player ........................................ 274Your CDs ................................................. 273

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 262Center Console Storage Area ...................... 151Center Flex Storage Unit ............................. 152Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Center Seat .................................................. 18Chains, Tire ................................................. 406Charging System Light ................................ 200Check

Engine Light ............................................ 206Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 332Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 425

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 55Older Children ........................................... 43Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..................... 65Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 65Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 53

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 182Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 424Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 422Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 420Finish Care .............................................. 423Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 418Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 421Leather .................................................... 421Tires ........................................................ 424Underbody Maintenance ........................... 425

483

Cleaning (cont.)Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 422Weatherstrips ........................................... 422Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 423

Climate Control System ............................... 182Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 192Dual Automatic ......................................... 186Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 192

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 472Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 418Compass ............................ 19, 130, 132, 218Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 110Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 280Convenience Net ......................................... 152Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 204Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 204Heater, Engine ......................................... 117

Cooled Seats ................................................ 12Cooling System .................................. 354, 360Cornering Lamps ......................................... 173Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 174Cruise Control ............................................. 167Cruise Control Light .................................... 210Cupholder(s) ................................................ 151

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation ........................... 469Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users ................. 464Customer Assistance Offices .................... 464Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 460GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 465Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 478Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 477Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 477Roadside Assistance Program .................. 466Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 478

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 172Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 174Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 175DIC Compass .............................................. 218Disc, MP3 ................................................... 262Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 326

484

DoorDelayed Locking ...................................... 103Locks ....................................................... 102Power Door Locks ................................... 103Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 104Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 104

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 25

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 212DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 212DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 231DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 221

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 291City .......................................................... 296Defensive ................................................. 276Drunken ................................................... 277Freeway ................................................... 297Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 300In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 293Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 307Winter ...................................................... 302

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 186

EElectric Power Management ........................ 176Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 428Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 428Power Windows and

Other Power Options ............................ 428Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 431Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 428

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 342Battery ..................................................... 370Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 206Coolant .................................................... 347Coolant Heater ......................................... 117Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 204Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 204Drive Belt Routing .................................... 454Engine Compartment Overview ................ 334Exhaust ................................................... 127Oil ........................................................... 337Oil Life System ........................................ 340

485

Engine (cont.)Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 353Overheating ............................................. 351Starting .................................................... 116

Entry Lighting .............................................. 174Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 471Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42Exterior Lamps ............................................ 170Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 173

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 342Finish Damage ............................................ 425Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 160Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 164Flat Tire ...................................................... 407Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 408Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 416

FluidAutomatic Transaxle ................................. 343Power Steering ........................................ 364Windshield Washer .................................. 365

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 210Fog Lamps .................................................. 173Front Reading Lamps .................................. 175Front Storage Area ...................................... 151Fuel ............................................................ 327

Additives .................................................. 328California Fuel .......................................... 328Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 332Filling Your Tank ...................................... 330Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 329Gage ....................................................... 211Gasoline Octane ...................................... 327Gasoline Specifications ............................ 328

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 428Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 431Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 428

486

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 204Fuel ......................................................... 211Speedometer ........................................... 196Tachometer .............................................. 196

Garage Door Opener .......................... 139, 140Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 327Specifications ........................................... 328

Glove Box ................................................... 151GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 465

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 160Head Restraints ............................................ 17Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 377

HeadlampsBulb Replacement .................................... 380Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 172Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 164Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 380High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 163On Reminder ........................................... 171Wiper Activated ........................................ 171

Heated Seats ......................................... 11, 12Heated Steering Wheel ............................... 161Heater ......................................................... 182Heater ......................................................... 186Highbeam On Light ..................................... 210Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 299Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 300Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 332Release ................................................... 333

Horn ............................................................ 160How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25

487

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 114Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ................. 177Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 392Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 158Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 174Cluster ..................................................... 194

JJump Starting .............................................. 372

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 94Keys ............................................................. 93

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 386Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 177Cornering ................................................. 173Courtesy .................................................. 174Electric Power Management ..................... 176Exterior .................................................... 170Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 173Fog .......................................................... 173Front Reading .......................................... 175Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 177

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 55

License Plate Lamps ................................... 383Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 197Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 202Brake System Warning ............................. 201Charging System ..................................... 200

488

Light (cont.)Cruise Control .......................................... 210Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 204Fog Lamp ................................................ 210Highbeam On .......................................... 210Malfunction Indicator ................................ 206Oil Pressure ............................................. 209Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 198Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 197Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 196Security ................................................... 210StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 203TCS Warning Light .................................. 202Tire Pressure ........................................... 205Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 202

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 174Delayed Exit ............................................ 175Entry ........................................................ 174Perimeter ................................................. 175Theater Dimming ..................................... 175

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 307Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 103Door ........................................................ 102Lockout Protection ................................... 105Power Door ............................................. 103

Locks (cont.)Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 104Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 104

Loss of Control ........................................... 290Lumbar

Power Controls .......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 444At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 448At Least Once a Month ............................ 449At Least Once a Year .............................. 449Introduction .............................................. 440Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 446Maintenance Record ................................ 455Maintenance Requirements ...................... 440Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 453Owner Checks and Services .................... 448Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 452Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 442Using ....................................................... 440Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 440

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 206Manual Passenger Seat .................................. 9Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 13

489

MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ................... 221

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview

with Compass ....................................... 132Automatic Dimming Rearview

with OnStar® ........................................ 129Automatic Dimming Rearview

with OnStar® and Compass .................. 130Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 129Manual Rearview Mirror with

Compass and Temperature ..................... 19Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 129Outside Automatic Dimming

Heated Mirror ....................................... 135Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 134Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 134Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 133

MP3 ............................................................ 262MyGMLink.com ............................................ 463

NNavigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................. 271New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 113Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 453

OOdometer .................................................... 196Odometer, Trip ............................................ 196Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 288Oil

Engine ..................................................... 337Pressure Light .......................................... 209

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 340Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43Online Owner Center ................................... 463OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 135Other Warning Devices ................................ 160

490

Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 192Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 181Outside

Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror ............ 135Convex Mirror .......................................... 134Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 134Power Mirrors .......................................... 133

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 353

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 448Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 425Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 285Park Aid ...................................................... 178Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 123Shifting Out of ......................................... 125

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 178Brake ....................................................... 122Over Things That Burn ............................ 126

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 198Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 192Passenger Sensing System ........................... 81Passing ....................................................... 288PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 111PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 112Perimeter Lighting ....................................... 175Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 181Door Locks .............................................. 103Electrical System ..................................... 428Inadvertent Battery Saver ......................... 177Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 115Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 364Windows .................................................. 109

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 104

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 24

491

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 351Radios ........................................................ 241

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 274Care of Your CDs .................................... 273Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 271Radio with CD ................................ 245, 251Setting the Time .............................. 242, 243Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 271Understanding Reception ......................... 272

Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 165Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 104Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 152Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with Compass .......................................... 132Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® ............................................ 129Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 130Rearview Mirror with Compass

and Temperature ........................................ 19Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 129Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 129

Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 14Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 452Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 313Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 94Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 95Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 410Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 409Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 383Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 477General Motors ........................................ 478United States Government ....................... 477

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 88Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 89Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 115Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 34Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 466Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 307Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 454Running the Engine While Parked ............... 128

492

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 197Pretensioners ............................................. 42Reminder Light ........................................ 196

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 422Center Front Passenger Position ................ 35Driver Position ........................................... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36Right Front Passenger Position .................. 34Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 34Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 19Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 33

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 442Seats

Center Seat ............................................... 18Head Restraints ......................................... 17Heated and Cooled Seats .......................... 12

Seats (cont.)Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual Passenger ....................................... 9Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 13Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Seats ................................................ 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 14

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ......................... 65Rear Seat Position ..................................... 62Right Front Seat Position ........................... 65

Security Light .............................................. 210Service ........................................................ 325

Accessories and Modifications .................. 325Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 327California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 326Doing Your Own Work ............................. 326Engine Soon Light ................................... 206Publications Ordering Information ............. 478

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 86Setting the Time ................................. 242, 243Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 425Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 123Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 125Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 162

493

Spare TireCompact .................................................. 418Installing .................................................. 410Removing ................................................ 409Storing ..................................................... 416

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 436Speedometer ............................................... 196StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 284StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 203Starting Your Engine ................................... 116Steering ...................................................... 285Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 271Steering Wheel, Heated .............................. 161Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 161Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 151Center Flex Storage Unit ......................... 152Convenience Net ..................................... 152Cupholder(s) ............................................ 151Front Storage Area .................................. 151Glove Box ................................................ 151Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 152

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 306Sun Visors .................................................. 109Sunroof ....................................................... 153

TTachometer ................................................. 196Taillamps

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 382Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................ 380TCS Warning Light ...................................... 202Theater Dimming ......................................... 175Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 271Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 110

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 110PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 111PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 112

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 161Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 205Tires ........................................................... 385

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 424

Buying New Tires ..................................... 400Chains ..................................................... 406Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 408Cleaning .................................................. 424Compact Spare Tire ................................. 418

494

Tires (cont.)Different Size ........................................... 402If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 407Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 392Inspection and Rotation ............................ 398Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 410Pressure Monitor System ......................... 393Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 410Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 409Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 416Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 386Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 389Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 402Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 404Wheel Replacement ................................. 404When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 400

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 313Towing a Trailer ....................................... 315Your Vehicle ............................................. 313

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 283Control System Warning Light .................. 202StabiliTrak® System ................................. 284

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 343

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 119Trip Odometer ............................................. 196Trunk .......................................................... 106Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 162Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 162

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 178Understanding Radio Reception ................... 272Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 402Universal Home Remote System ........ 139, 140

Operation ........................................ 141, 147

495

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 280Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 307Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 231Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders .............................. 471Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 427Service Parts Identification Label .............. 427

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 192Visors .......................................................... 109

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 194Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 221Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 160Other Warning Devices ............................ 160Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 404Different Size ........................................... 402Replacement ............................................ 404

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 53Windows ..................................................... 108

Power ...................................................... 109Windshield

Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 165Washer .................................................... 166Washer Fluid ........................................... 365Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 383Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 423Wipers ..................................................... 164

Winter Driving ............................................. 302Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 171

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 269XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 274

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 440

496

2007 Buick Lucerne Owner Manual M - General Motors · 2007 Buick Lucerne Owner Manual M 1. Tires ... for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. This manual describes

Documents